JP2017136168A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of specifying whether or not the inspection of image data storage means is normally performed.SOLUTION: A sub control section 91, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, executes control for inspecting the stored contents of CGROMs 99a to 99c and the result of the inspection is written in a prescribed register as display instruction data, thereby allowing the result of the inspection to be displayed in a liquid crystal display 51. When control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is executed, performance effects LEDs 52a to 52c, reel 55, LED 56 for performance, and checking LED 59 are controlled in a lighting mode in which the mode can be visually recognized to be different from the normal performance mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 53

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  This type of gaming machine includes a CPU that controls image display, and when the CPU receives a test command, it performs a checksum operation on the image data in the CGROM in which the image data is stored and displays the result. There has been proposed an apparatus in which image data can be inspected by being displayed on an apparatus (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-155788 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when displaying the checksum calculation result of the image data in the CGROM on the display device, when the inspection is not performed normally or when the display device itself has a problem. Finally, the inspection result is not displayed on the display device, and in this case, it cannot be specified whether the inspection is not performed normally or the display device is defective.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can specify whether or not the inspection of the image data storage means has been normally performed.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of means 1 of the present invention is:
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
Image display means (liquid crystal display 51) capable of displaying an image;
Informing means provided separately from the image display means (effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, reel LED 55, effect LED 56a, checking LED 59),
Display control means (sub-control unit 91) for performing display control of the image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
Control data storage means (ROM 91b) for storing control data of the display control means (production control program);
Image data storage means (CGROMs 99a to 99c) for storing image data (information display data) of an image to be displayed on the image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
With
The display control means includes
Inspection means (simple check, detailed check) for inspecting the stored contents of the image data storage means (CGROM 99a-c);
Inspection result display control means for displaying inspection results (simple check screen, detailed check screen) by the inspection means (simple check, detailed check) on the image display means (liquid crystal display 51);
When the inspection by the inspection means (simple check, detailed check) is performed, the notification means (production effect LEDs 52a to 52c, reel LED 55, production LED 56a, checking LED 59) is different from a normal mode in a predetermined mode. Notification control means (checking mode 1, checking mode 2);
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, when the inspection by the inspection unit that inspects the storage content of the image data storage unit is being performed, the mode of the notification unit provided separately from the image display unit is different from the normal mode. Since it is possible to recognize that the inspection by the inspection unit is being performed, if the inspection result is not finally displayed on the image display unit, whether the inspection by the inspection unit has not been performed normally is displayed as an image. It is possible to estimate whether a problem has occurred in the means.

In the means 1, the display control means may be constituted by one control means or may be constituted by a plurality of control means.
In the means 1, the inspection of the storage contents of the image data storage means by the inspection means may be any inspection that can determine whether the storage contents of the image data storage means are normal, for example, image data Whether the specific data stored in the storage means or the calculation result calculated by the predetermined calculation from the image data stored in the image data storage means is normal by the output specific data or calculation result. It may be possible to determine whether or not the calculation result calculated by a predetermined calculation from the specific data stored in the image data storage means or the image data stored in the image data storage means It may be configured to be able to determine whether it is normal or not depending on whether it is a specific value, or it may be a special feature stored in the image data storage means. Whether the calculation result calculated by the predetermined calculation from the image data stored in the image data storage means or the image data storage means matches a specific value stored in the other storage means. A configuration that can be determined may be used.
The notification means may be provided separately from the image display means. For example, the notification means is separate from the image display means, the light emission means such as a lamp or LED that changes the light emission mode, and the sound output. This corresponds to sound output means for changing the mode.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The notification means (production effect LEDs 52a to 52c, reel LED 55, production LED 56a, checking LED 59) includes production means (production effect LEDs 52a to 52c, reel LED 55, production LED 56a) used for production. .
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the inspection by the inspection means is performed using the effect means used for the effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The notification means (checking LED 59) is provided on a board (production control board 90) on which display control means (sub-control unit 91) is mounted.
According to this feature, the inspection by the inspection unit can be performed only with the substrate on which the display control unit is mounted.

A gaming machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The image display means (liquid crystal display 51) has a transmissive display area (transmissive area 51b) in which members (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) arranged on the back surface can be visually recognized.
The inspection result display control means displays the inspection results (simple check screen, detailed check screen) by the inspection means (simple check, detailed check) on the transmissive display area (transmissive area 51b) in the image display means (liquid crystal display 51). It is characterized in that it is displayed in a region other than (display region 51a).
According to this feature, the visibility of the inspection result displayed by the image display unit can be ensured.

A gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The control data storage unit (ROM 91b) stores image data (information display data) of an image constituting an inspection result (simple check screen, detailed check screen) by the inspection unit (simple check, detailed check),
The inspection result display control means uses the image data (information display data) stored in the control data storage means (ROM 91b) (simple check, detailed check) inspection results (simple check screen, detailed check screen). ) Is displayed on the image display means (liquid crystal display 51).
According to this feature, when displaying the inspection result of the inspection means for inspecting the storage contents of the image data storage means on the image display means, not the image data stored in the image data storage means but the control data storage means. Since the inspection result by the inspection means is displayed on the image display means using the stored image data, the inspection result is made normal even when there is an abnormality in the image data stored in the image data storage means. Can be displayed.
The image data of the image constituting the inspection result by the inspection means corresponds to, for example, image data when displaying the inspection result as an image, font data when displaying the character / symbol, and the like.

A gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The display control means (sub-control unit 91) is a control state display control for displaying information (command history, backup data, time information) indicating the control state of the display control means on the image display means (liquid crystal display 51). Including means (information display control for inspection),
The control status display control means uses information (command history, backup data, time) indicating the control status of the display control means using image data (information display data) stored in the control data storage means (ROM 91b). Information) is displayed on the image display means (liquid crystal display 51).
According to this feature, information indicating the control state of the display control unit is displayed on the image display unit using the image data stored in the control data storage unit, not the image data stored in the image data storage unit. Therefore, even when there is an abnormality in the image data stored in the image data storage means, information indicating the control state of the display control means can be displayed normally.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control part. It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM and RAM which a main control part mounts. It is a figure which shows the detail of the memory map of ROM and RAM which a main control part mounts. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game program and a non-game program. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area | region and a non-game area | region. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of processing when a non-game program is called from processing based on a game program during execution of the main processing, and (b) is based on a game program during execution of the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of calling a non-game program from a process. It is a figure which shows the area | region of RAM which a main control part initializes when the 1st condition and the 2nd condition are satisfied. (A) is a timing chart showing the output timing of the medal OUT signal and the security signal that the main control unit outputs to the external output board when detecting an abnormality that does not prevent the game from progressing, and (b) is the security signal. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the output timing of. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel control process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation start process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop control table setting process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of special combination, the symbol combination of a special combination, and a special combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of re-game player, the symbol combination of a re-game player, and a re-game player. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical combination relevant to the symbol combination of a transfer event, and a transfer event. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is permitted by a lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is permitted by a lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several small part winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several re-game player winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several re-game player winning. It is a figure which shows the winning number and transmission number of the special role in the 1st internal winning command which a main control part transmits. It is a figure which shows the winning number and transmission number of the general combination and re-game combination in the 2nd internal winning command which a main control part transmits. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal winning command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the navigation number in the pushing order command which a main control part transmits. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the pushing order command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the reel front surface effect which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the transmittance | permeability in the permeation | transmission area | region of a liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the front effect during non-game which a sub control part performs. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the front effect during non-game which a sub control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of a winning line, a pattern, and non-game front production. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of error alerting effect which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the error alerting effect which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the notification effect during a setting change which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the standby production which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of reel LED. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting aspect of reel LED according to the execution condition of a reel front surface effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content of reel LED and a permeation | transmission area regarding the backlight production which a sub-control part performs, and the dark display mode of the permeation | transmission area | region of a liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lighting aspect of reel LED. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the accessory effect which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure which shows the structure of the apparatus relevant to the CGROM check which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the data for collation memorize | stored in ROM and CGROM of a sub control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the check screen displayed when a sub-control part performs the simple check of CGROM. It is a figure for demonstrating the check screen displayed when a sub control part performs the detailed check of CGROM. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content of the simple check of CGROM which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content of the detailed check of CGROM which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content of the test | inspection display control which a sub control part performs.

  A mode for carrying out a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, a slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side of the housing 1a. And a front door 1b pivotally supported at the end.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 3, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “watermelon”, “cherry a”, “cherry” are respectively provided on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “b”, “bell”, “replay a”, “replay b”, and “plum” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided at the approximate center of the front door 1b.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4) provided in correspondence with each other, so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuous with the see-through window 3. On the other hand, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped from rotating, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a transmissive liquid crystal panel in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and the transmissive area 51b corresponding to the transmissive window 3 of the display area 51a and the transmissive window 3 are interposed. Thus, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front door 1b, there are a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). In the range, the maximum bet number among the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state (in this embodiment, 3 is set as the specified number of RT0 to RT4 described later, and 2 is set as the specified number of RBs). The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the medals, and the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medals used for setting the credit and bet number are returned) Adjusting switch 10 that is operated when the game is started, start switch 7 that is operated when the game is started, and stop switches that are operated when the rotation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. Pitch 8L, 8C, 8R, effect switch 56 to be used in effect are respectively provided so as to be operated by the player.

  In this embodiment, among the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b shows a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning, and the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code, information for identifying the stop order of reels by navigation notification described later, a 1BETLED 14 for informing that the betting number is set to 1, and 2 betting numbers are set. 2BETLED 15 to notify that the bet is set, 3BETLED 16 to notify that the bet number is set to 3, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted is lit, and the game by operating the start switch 7 A start valid LED 18 for notifying that the start operation is valid by lighting, wait (the previous game (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the beginning) A waiting LED 19 that lights up to indicate that it is in progress, and a replaying LED 20 that lights up to indicate that a replay game is in progress The game display section 13 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the bet amount by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided inside the 8R to notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid by lighting. An effect LED 56a (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective is provided inside the effect switch 56.

  Further, the upper position of the front door 1b can be moved to a storage position stored inside the front door 1b below the upper surface of the front door 1b and a protruding position protruding above the upper surface of the front door 1b. An accessory 300 having a large protruding body 301 is provided. The projecting body 301 is movable back and forth between the storage position and the projecting position by driving the production motor 305 (see FIG. 4). In addition, a rotating lamp 302 that can be turned on while rotating in a predetermined manner is provided inside the protruding body 301. When the protruding body 301 is located at the storage position and the protruding position, the rotating lamp 302 is provided. Can be lit and rotated. Further, the projecting body 301 includes a transparent case body 303 that surrounds the rotating lamp 302. When the projecting body 301 is moved to the projecting position, a player or the like holds the rotating lamp 302 in the projecting body 301. In addition to being unable to touch, when the rotating lamp 302 is lit and rotated at the protruding position, the lighting and rotation can be visually recognized from the player side through the case body 303. Further, the front surface portion (player side) of the accessory 300 is formed of a transparent transmissive panel 306 so that the player etc. cannot touch the protruding body 301 located at the storage position, and the player side The light emission of the rotating lamp of the projecting body 301 stored at the storage position through the transmission panel 306 and the case body 303 can be visually recognized.

  Inside the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state to be described later and a stop state to be described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value to be described later A set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time while checking the set value, and a hit that controls to a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at a predetermined trigger A stop switch 36a for selecting the validity / invalidity of the stop function, automatic control for automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at a predetermined opportunity An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting validity / invalidity of the settlement function, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 are provided in a hopper tank 34a (described later) provided inside the housing 1a. 2) or a medal payout outlet 9 for selectively switching to one of the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion part 4, and a medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that has flowed to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector 29 having an insertion port sensor 26 for detecting insertion of a foreign object on the upstream side of the insertion medal sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  In the housing 1a, as shown in FIG. 2, the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are respectively shown. A reel unit 2 comprising detectable reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 (see FIG. 4) for outputting an external output signal, and a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are stored. Hopper tank 34a, a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank 34a from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 4), and a payout sensor 34c for detecting the medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 4). A hopper unit 34 and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a (see FIG. 4) is provided for detecting that the stored medal has become full.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a function key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. In the setting change state, a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery described later, and a power source that is operated when turning on / off the power source A switch 39 is provided.

  The power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a, and the front door 1b can be opened by a predetermined key operation held by a store clerk or the like. The set key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 are operated only by a person such as a store clerk who has the key, and cannot be operated by the player. The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation after the front door 1b is opened by key operation, only the store clerk possessing the key for operating the setting key switch 37 among the game store clerk. Operation is possible.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. In this embodiment, three bets are defined as a specified number of bets in RT0 to 4 described later, and two bets are determined as a specified number of bets in RB described later. When the bet number is set, the winning line LN becomes valid. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage, is used as the winning line. It has been established. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, invalid lines LM1 to LM1 are set apart from the winning line LN in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning line. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not determined based on the combination of symbols arranged in the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. When the combination of symbols constituting a specific prize is arranged on the winning line LN, the invalid line is displayed. When a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) is selected when winning line LN is aligned with any of LM1 to LM4, a symbol that constitutes a specific winning line on winning line LN is displayed. It is easy to recognize that the combination is complete.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, an invalid line LM1 and a lower stage of the reel 2L, which are set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper stage. , The lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower stage, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the lower side There are four types of invalid lines LM3 set across straddling symbols LM3, lower stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, upper stage of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 set straddling to the right. It is defined as.

  In the present embodiment, as a winning combination, a winning combination is obtained when a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry b”) determined as a winning combination in the winning line LN is prepared, and the predetermined symbol is also obtained. When the combination is aligned, any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 has a combination of symbols (for example, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”) that serves as an index that is easier to recognize than the predetermined symbol combination. The combination which can be shown as having won a prize by the combination of the symbols arranged in any of the above is included. Hereinafter, a combination of symbols that is aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 when a predetermined symbol combination is aligned with the winning line LN is referred to as a symbol combination serving as an index, and constitutes a symbol combination serving as an index. The symbol is called an index symbol.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a winning combination) is displayed on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line LN. If the game stops as a result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. .

  In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. Further, one unit of control (game control) for executing a game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

  In this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, a configuration using four or more reels may be used. In the configuration using two or more reels, a winning determination may be made based on a combination of display results derived for all two or more reels. In this embodiment, the variable display device is configured by physical reels. However, the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead is used. Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The symbols arranged within 5 frames including can be displayed on the winning line.

  Hereinafter, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels unless it is necessary to distinguish between them. Further, the reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C as a middle reel, and the reel 2R as a right reel. Further, an operation for stopping the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are generated. To be supplied. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input. Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, the BET switch valid LED 21, the left The middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R are connected, and the hopper motor 34b described above is connected via the power supply board 101. These electrical components are connected, and are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 performs processing related to the progress of the game, and at the same time, controls the respective parts of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 directly or indirectly, and becomes an oscillation signal of a predetermined frequency. A control clock generation circuit 42 for generating a control clock CCLK, a random number clock generation circuit 43 for generating a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, and a game control board 40, a switch detection circuit 44 that takes in detection signals input from switches connected directly or via the power supply board 101 and transmits them to the main control unit 41, and a motor drive signal (stepping) output from the main control unit 41. Motor drive circuit 45 for transmitting the motor phase signal) to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 that transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30; and the various displays connected to the game control board 40 with the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 When a voltage drop is detected by monitoring the voltage of the LED drive circuit 47 that transmits to the LED and the power supply supplied to the slot machine 1, a voltage drop signal indicating that is output to the main control unit 41 And a reset circuit 49 that provides a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the power supply is unstable such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off.

  FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a verification block 503, a specific information storage circuit 504, an arithmetic circuit 505, a reset / interrupt controller 506, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 41a, ROM (Read Only Memory) 41b, RAM (Random Access Memory) 41c, free-run counter circuit 507, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509, interrupt controller 510 A parallel input port 511, a serial communication circuit 512, a parallel output port 513, and an address decoding circuit 514.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests generated inside or outside the main control unit 41. The reset / interrupt controller 506 includes an out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit 506a and a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. The IAT circuit 506a is a circuit that monitors whether the user program is correctly executed in the designated area, and has a function of outputting an IAT generation signal when it is detected that the user program is executed outside the designated area. The watchdog timer 506b has a function of generating a time-out signal for each set period.

  The external bus interface 501 is a bus interface having an interface function between an external bus and an internal bus of a chip constituting the main control unit 41, an address bus, a data bus, and a direction control function of each control signal. The clock circuit 502 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the control clock CCLK by two. The verification block 503 is connected to an external verification machine and has a function of performing chip verification. The unique information storage circuit 504 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the main control unit 41. The arithmetic circuit 505 is a circuit that performs multiplication and division.

  The CPU 41a is a control CPU that executes game control in the slot machine 1 by executing a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 41b. When such game control is executed, the CPU 41a reads fixed data from the ROM 41b, the variable data writing operation in which the CPU 41a writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 41c and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 41a is temporarily stored in the RAM 41c. A variable data reading operation for reading out various variable data being received, a receiving operation in which the CPU 41a receives input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the parallel input port 511, the serial communication circuit 512, etc. However, a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like is also performed.

  The ROM 41b stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The RAM 41c provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period.

  As the free-run counter circuit 507, an 8-bit free-run counter is mounted. The random number circuits 508a and 508b are circuits that generate numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as an 8-bit random number or a 16-bit random number. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b among the random number circuits 508a and 508b is used as a random number for internal lottery described later. The timer circuit 509 is a 16-bit programmable timer, counts down the set timer value based on the input of the control clock CCLK, and outputs an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller when reaching 0000H. In this embodiment, the timer circuit 509 can be used to perform periodic interrupt requests and time measurement.

  The interrupt controller 510 is a circuit that controls external interrupt requests from interrupt terminals and interrupt requests from built-in peripheral circuits (for example, serial communication circuit 512, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509). . The parallel input port 511 incorporates an 8-bit wide input-only port. Also, the parallel output port 513 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 4 incorporates an output-only port having an 11-bit width. The serial communication circuit 512 is a circuit that performs asynchronous serial communication in input / output with respect to the outside.

  The address decoding circuit 514 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the main control unit 41 and a chip select signal that is a decoding signal for an external device. In response to the chip select signal, the internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or the external device serving as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively and can be accessed from the CPU 41a.

  For example, when the main control unit 41 accesses an area of the storage area of the ROM 41b where no program or the like is stored, the main control section 41 accesses an area of the storage area of the RAM 41c where access is prohibited. In other words, when an access to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation is made, an illegal access reset is generated to disable the progress of the game. Even if an unauthorized program is stored in an area unrelated to the above, an unused area of the RAM 41c, etc., it is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being executed.

  The main control unit 41 is activated when an internal or external reset occurs. At this time, the value assigned to the ROM 41b and set in the vector table in which the start address of the interrupt process is set. Is a value indicating unused or a value indicating the area where the program etc. is actually stored, and if it is not any value, it will not start, It is possible to prevent in advance the processing that was not originally intended due to the occurrence or the like.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513. A command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the sub control unit 91 toward the main control unit 41. In this embodiment, the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513, that is, the command is transmitted as a parallel signal, but via the serial communication circuit 512. A configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, that is, a configuration in which the command is transmitted as a serial signal may be employed.

  The main control unit 41 also receives detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the parallel input port 511. The main control unit 41 executes main processing that shifts in stages according to the detection states of various switches input from the parallel input port 511. Also, the main control unit 41 can execute the interrupt process by interrupting the main process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main) is executed every time a time-out occurs in the timer circuit 509, that is, every fixed time interval (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment). In addition, the main control unit 41 is set to automatically prohibit other interrupts during execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, a predetermined order is set. The interrupt to be executed with priority is set by. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process ends, the interrupt will occur when the interrupt process ends. The prohibition is automatically released and a new interrupt is generated at that time. Note that other interrupts are set to be automatically disabled during the execution of interrupt processing, and interrupt processing is not automatically canceled when interrupt processing is completed. Other interrupts may be prohibited by the program at the start, and the interrupt prohibition may be canceled by the program at the end of the interrupt process.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main process, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute a process that moves in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time taken to repeat the process repeated in accordance with the control state in the main process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  An effect switch 56, a standby effect switch 57, and an effect restriction switch 58 are connected to the effect control board 90, and detection signals of the effect switch 56, the standby effect switch 57 and the effect restriction switch 58 are input. It has become. In addition, effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, speakers 53 and 54, reel LED 55, and accessory 300 are connected, and these effect devices are the below-described subs mounted on the effect control board 90. It is driven based on control by the control unit 91. Further, an accessory sensor 304 provided inside the accessory 300 is connected, and based on the output of the accessory sensor 304, it can be specified whether the protruding body 301 is located in the storage position or the protruding position. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effects LEDs 52a to 52c, speakers 53 and 54, reel LED 55, and accessory 300. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 controls the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined based on the command from the output device, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, The output control of the effect device is performed by both the control unit 91 and the output control unit. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the accessory 300 are illustrated as the effect devices. However, the effect device is not limited to these, for example, A display device that is mechanically driven, a mechanically driven item, and the like may be applied as the rendering device.

  In addition, the effect control board 90 is equipped with CGROMs 99a to 99c that store image data for effects to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 when the sub control unit 91 executes the effect using the liquid crystal display 51. The display control circuit 92 can refer to the image data and the like stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c. The effect control board 90 is equipped with a checking LED 59, and is controlled to be lit in a predetermined lighting mode by the sub-control unit 91 during inspection of CGROMs 99a to 99c described later. In addition, the effect control board 90 is equipped with a power LED 60 connected to a power source for supplying power to the sub-control unit 91 and the like, and the power LED 60 is turned on when the effect control board 90 is supplied with power. It is supposed to be.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer having a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d, and a sub control unit 91 for controlling the effect, and a liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control, LED effect circuits 52a to 93c that control driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that performs audio output control from the speakers 53 and 54, and A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and a switch that detects a detection signal input from the switches connected to the effect control board 90 Detection circuit 96 and a clock for outputting time information including date information and time information 97, a power failure detection circuit 98 that monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 91a when a voltage drop is detected, and other circuits Etc. are installed.

  The production effect LEDs 52a to 52c are arranged on the front door 1b and are composed of a plurality of LEDs (not shown) whose light emission is visible from the player side. The production effect LED 52a is mainly a liquid crystal display on the front door 1b. The LED group is arranged in the upper part of the display 51, the effect LED 52b is mainly the LED group arranged in the left and right part of the liquid crystal display 51 in the front door 1b, and the effect LED 52c is mainly the front. It is a group of LEDs arranged on the panel 200 portion on which the title of the slot machine 1 and the payout table are printed on the door 1b.

  The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing an effect in accordance with an effect control program or the like stored in the ROM 91b, and is mounted on the effect control board 90. Control each part of the control circuit directly or indirectly.

  The reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. When the power is turned on, the sub control unit 91 It starts at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power interruption detection circuit 98 has a voltage that outputs a voltage drop signal lower than the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  The standby effect switch 57 is disposed inside the front door 1b, and the standby effect executed by the sub control unit 91 when the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in the standby state is set as a normal demonstration effect. Or a power saving mode in which the power consumption is reduced compared to the demonstration production, and the switch is operated by a store clerk or the like to respond to either the demonstration production or the power saving mode. A signal is input to the effect control board 90.

  In addition, the effect restriction switch 58 is disposed inside the front door 1b, and in the effect effect using the accessory 300 executed by the sub control unit 91, the accessory 300 is moved from the storage position to the protruding position. A signal corresponding to either one of whether or not to restrict the operation of the accessory 300 by operating the switch by a store clerk or the like is sent to the effect control board 90. It is designed to be entered.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Execute command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 executes an interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the input number of system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 2 ms). Also, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even when the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when an interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time. The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to the set value in a lottery that affects the advantage to the player, such as an internal lottery, a navigation stock lottery, and an extra lottery to be described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the changed state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated one by one (when the set value 6 is further operated, the set value 1 is set. Return). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Note that when the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b is opened, and the configuration shifts to the setting change state. Well, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes in a state where the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in the configuration that shifts to the setting change state on the condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 supports the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting change state. Even if the detection is not detected, it is preferable to maintain the setting change state. Thus, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting change, an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed again. This is not necessary, and the setting change operation is not complicated. Further, after the transition to the setting change state, when the setting value is determined by operating the start switch 7 and then the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b is opened. On the condition that the setting change state is terminated, it may be configured to shift to a state in which the game can proceed. Even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is not opened in an unauthorized manner. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  It should be noted that, after the game is over, when the setting key switch 37 is turned on with no bet number set, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b has been opened. In addition, a configuration for shifting to the setting confirmation state may be adopted. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being illegally confirmed without the front door 1b being opened. In addition, in the configuration that shifts to the setting confirmation state on the condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 supports the opening of the front door 1b after the transition to the setting confirmation state. It is preferable to maintain the setting confirmation state even if the detection to be performed is not performed. Thus, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting confirmation, an operation for shifting to the setting confirmation state again is performed. This is not necessary and the setting confirmation operation is not complicated. In addition, after shifting to the setting confirmation state, when the set key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated and the set value is confirmed, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b is opened. On the condition that the setting confirmation state is terminated, it may be configured to return to a state in which the game can proceed, and even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is not opened in an unauthorized manner. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being confirmed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interruption process (main) is executed. When the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, a power interruption process (main) for setting data for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the next return is performed. Run.

  Then, the main control unit 41 returns the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of activation. However, if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state, thereby disabling the progress of the game.

  The error state shifts to a normal error state that is canceled by a reset operation (operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23) and the setting change state described above, and is canceled until a new setting value is set. Special error status with no error, the RAM abnormal error status is a special error status, and once it is controlled to the RAM abnormal error status, it shifts to the setting change status and is released until a new set value is set. It will not be done.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 is detected in the timer interruption process (sub), and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected, A power interruption process (sub) for setting data for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the next return is executed.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 returns the processing state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the data of the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation. However, if the data in the RAM 91c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main control unit 41, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the performance is not disabled.

  In addition, even when it is determined that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation, the sub control unit 91 activates when receiving a setting command (described later) indicating that the setting change state has been entered from the main control unit 41 Even when a later-described return command or setting command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has returned is not received even after a certain period of time has elapsed, the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, the execution of the performance is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The usable area in the storage area of the RAM 41c is divided into a game RAM area, an unused area 4, and a non-game RAM area (see FIG. 7B). Further, the game RAM area is divided into a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3 and a game stack area. The special work is a work that stores data that is not initialized even if the setting value is changed, and stores software random numbers, setting values, data indicating a gaming state, and the like. The important work is a work in which data which is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end of a specific gaming state (RB, BB) is stored. The display data of the LED, the input / output data of the input port, the output port, the game time A time counter and the like are stored. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of a specific gaming state, and stores stop symbols, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like. The unused area 3 is a work that is not used by any program. The game stack area is an area in which data saved from a register of the main control unit 41 during execution of a game program to be described later is stored.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 has the data in the RAM 41c when the setting key switch 37 is ON and the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is ON. Each of the initial conditions is established when the five initialization conditions are satisfied, that is, when the setting change state is terminated, when a specific game state (RB, BB) is terminated, or when one game is terminated. Five types of initialization are performed in different areas to be initialized according to the initialization conditions.

  Initialization 0 is initialization that is performed when data in the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on. In initialization 0, all the usable areas are initialized. . Initialization 1 is initialization that is performed when data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup with the setting key switch 37 being ON. In the initialization 1, an area other than the special work in the game RAM area is not All areas of the game RAM area are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization that is performed after the setting change state is completed by starting with the setting key switch 37 being ON. In initialization 2, special work and game stack areas (in use) in the game RAM area are used. Areas other than) are initialized. Initialization 3 is initialization performed at the end of a specific gaming state. In initialization 3, the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) of the game RAM area are initialized. The storage area for the data indicating the set value and the game state is allocated to the special work, and when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup with the setting key switch 37 being ON, that is, the data in the RAM 41c. When the game is normal and the setting is changed, data indicating the setting value and the gaming state is held. In addition, a storage area for a timer counter, which will be described later, is allocated to an important work and is retained without being initialized at the end of the game or at the end of a specific gaming state.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when performing the above-described initialization, designates a start address and an end address as the initialization target RAM address, so that one byte from the designated start address. After overwriting the data with 0, calculate the logical sum of the 1-byte data, and if the calculation result is 0, repeat the process of moving to the next address until the specified end address is reached. Initialize the RAM area in the specified address range.

  When the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment is activated due to the occurrence of a reset, the main control unit 41 performs setting at the time of activation. In the startup setting, a status flag included in the main control unit 41 is initialized. The status flag is data that holds the state of the operation result and execution result of the instruction, and particularly includes an interrupt master permission flag for setting interrupt prohibition / permission. Since the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating prohibition of interrupt, the main control unit 41 is started in a state where interrupt is prohibited. Then, after setting various functions with reference to the HW parameters described later, when a reset occurs according to the program stored in the program / data area, it starts in an interrupt-disabled state and then executes first Start the initial setting process.

  In the initial setting process, the main control unit 41 first sets interrupts to be prohibited, and then determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at startup, and the setting key switch 37 is ON in startup. When it is determined that the state is in the state, the process proceeds to the setting change process, and the RAM 41c is initialized at the start of the setting change process. At this time, if the data in the RAM 41c is normal, a part of the control state (setting value, gaming state, etc.) before the change is changed after the setting change by holding the special work and initializing other areas. On the other hand, if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the abnormality in the data in the RAM 41c can be surely solved by initializing all the usable areas including the special work. It has become.

  After initialization of the RAM 41c, the interrupt is set to be permitted, the set value is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 6 every time the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and after the start switch 7 is detected ON, The setting value when the setting key switch 37 is detected ON is stored in the RAM 41c, and the setting change process is terminated.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 starts with the interrupt master permission flag indicating that the interrupt is prohibited and is disabled, and in the initial setting process after the start, Since the initial setting process is executed after the interruption is set to be prohibited, it is possible to prevent an unintended interruption from occurring.

  Moreover, the main control part 41 performs the main process which processes in steps according to progress of a game for every game unit after completion | finish of a setting change process. In the main process, the RAM 41c is initialized for each game unit, and the RAM 41c is also initialized at the end of the setting change process. After the setting change process, the main process starts from the stage before the process of initializing the RAM 41c in the main process. The initialization of the RAM 41c after the setting change process is completed and the game unit It is possible to perform initialization of the RAM 41c for each process by common processing.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by executing a game area initialization process in the setting change process and the main process. In the game area initialization process, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated by designating the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, and the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated from the start address of the initialization target RAM. By sequentially clearing the minutes area, the designated initialization target RAM area in the game RAM area is initialized.

  By specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the process of updating the specified address to the next address after setting the start address as the initial value of the specified address and clearing the data of the specified address. By repeatedly executing the designated address until the end address is reached, the area from the start address of the initialization target RAM to the end address may be initialized.

  In the non-game area initialization process of the present embodiment, the initialization target RAM is cleared by sequentially clearing the RAM area for the capacity of the initialization target RAM from the start address of the initialization target RAM (the start address of the unused area 4). The area from the start address to the end address, that is, the unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area are initialized.

  By specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the process of updating the specified address to the next address after setting the start address as the initial value of the specified address and clearing the data of the specified address. By repeatedly executing the designated address until the end address is reached, the area from the start address of the initialization target RAM to the end address may be initialized.

  Further, in the non-game area initialization process of the present embodiment, by setting the start address of the unused area 4 as the start address of the initialization target RAM, all of the unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area are initialized. However, the non-game area initialization process only needs to initialize at least a part of the non-game RAM area, and initializes a part of the non-game RAM area. However, a part of the non-game RAM area and the unused area 4 may be initialized.

  In this embodiment, in the game area initialization process and the non-game area initialization process, the 1-byte data stored in the specified address is overwritten with 0 and cleared, and then the logic of the 1-byte data is changed. The sum is calculated to determine whether or not the calculation result is 0. If the calculation result is not 0, the processing for clearing the 1-byte data by overwriting with 0 is performed again, so that the corresponding address is obtained. Although the configuration is such that the data is cleared, a configuration in which 1-byte data stored in the specified address is overwritten with 0 and cleared is also possible.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specified number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state (RT0 to RT4, RB) (in this embodiment, 3 for RT0-4 and 2 for RB) is determined. Thus, the game can be started on condition that a specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set.

  In this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line is activated (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always activated. A winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “combinations” is arranged on the winning line. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

  The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c. Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  Next, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each combination described above before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the start switch 7 At the time of detection). In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value generated by the random number circuit 508b and stored in the random number value register of the random number circuit 508b is set as the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. And, for each combination determined according to the gaming state (RT0-4, RB), each combination determined according to the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the current gaming state, the number of bets and the set value Whether or not winning is permitted is determined according to the number of determination values.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined in accordance with the internal lottery target, the current gaming state, and the set value are sequentially assigned to the random number for internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  Then, a winning number indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the RAM 41c. The winning number is used for setting of an internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, and the like.

  When a winning combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined based on the winning number is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special role is elected, the special role winning flag indicating that the special role is elected is set in the special role storing work, and when the general role is elected, the general role is elected. The winning combination flag indicating the general role is set in the general role storing work. If no winning combination or combination of winning combinations is won, the special combination storing work and the general combination storing work are cleared.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. The main control unit 41 displays the winning number, the table index stored in the ROM 41b, and the table creation data when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Referring to this, a stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding symbols, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing in a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, if any of the winning combinations is won, when the stop operation is performed, the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. If possible, control is performed to align and stop, and the winning combination that has not been won is controlled to be stopped without being aligned in the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. When a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, such as when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the maximum on the winning line when the stop operation is performed If it is possible to align and stop the winning roles in the 4-frame pull-in range, control will be performed to align them and stop them, and the winning roles will be selected on the winning line within the maximum 4-frame pull-in range. If it is not possible to withdraw, if a special role that has been elected within the draw range of up to 4 frames can be aligned and stopped on the winning line, it will be controlled and stopped. Control to stop without aligning in the drawing range of 4 frames will be performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. In the case where a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the small combination is not aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special combination. Also, when a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn, the small role is placed on the winning line. You may perform control to align.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the special role and the replaying role are won at the same time, such as when the replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the stop operation is performed. In this case, the control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer to be simultaneously elected are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, that is, within 4 frames, for any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the timing of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Without fail, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop control is performed by using a stop control table that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. A configuration that performs stop control by specifying the stop position from the table and stopping the reel at the specified stop position, and searching for a stop position that can be stopped when the stop operation is performed without using the stop control table or the stop position table. A configuration that performs stop control that identifies and stops the reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, and can be stopped without using the stop control table or the stop position table A configuration that uses stop control by searching and specifying the stop position together, and a configuration that performs stop control by partially changing the stop control table and stop position table. It may be.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 measures the game time, which is the time elapsed from the start of the reel rotation every time the reel starts rotating after the game starts. After a game is over, when a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and the game start operation is enabled, the reel start of the previous game is started. If the game time that has started counting from the time is more than the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), that is, if the specified time has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game, no wait is generated. At that time, the reel for the game in the game is started to rotate. On the other hand, after the end of one game, when a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game is started. If the game time that started timing from the time is less than the specified time, that is, if the specified time has not elapsed since the start of reel rotation of the previous game, a wait is generated and the reel starts rotating at that time. First, it waits until the game time that has started timing from the reel rotation start time of the previous game reaches the specified time, and starts rotating the reel when it reaches the specified time.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs control to output an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like. These external output signals are output to a hall device such as a hall computer via the information output terminal board of the game shop (hall) where the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed.

  The main control unit 41 has a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals awarded to the player due to the occurrence of winning, and the gaming state is RB (regular bonus). RB signal indicating the effect, BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB (big bonus), an ART signal indicating the start of ART described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, described later A setting change signal indicating the transition to the setting change mode, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality of the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality of the hopper unit 34 are output.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit, a parallel / serial conversion circuit, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board. Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the ART signal are directly output as pulse signals to the information providing terminal board via the relay circuit. . On the other hand, the door opening signal, setting change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel-serial conversion circuit, and information is provided. Output to the terminal board.

  Next, commands that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 sends an input number command, a credit command, a gaming state command, an ART state command, an internal winning command, a push order command, a freeze command, an ART lottery result command to the sub-control unit 91. Reel acceleration information command, acceleration completion command, stop operation command, sliding frame number command, stop command, game end command, winning judgment command, payout start command, payout end command, standby command, stop command, error command, return command A plurality of types of commands including a setting command, a setting confirmation command, a door command, and an operation detection command are transmitted. These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the command type and 1-byte extension data indicating the command content, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the command type from the type data.

  The inserted number command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, and is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game. Or, when a prescribed number of bets is not set, a medal is inserted, or when the bet number is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6. The inserted number command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, so that it is possible to specify that the betting number setting operation has been performed by receiving the inserted number command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, and in a state where a predetermined number of bets is set, Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The game state command is a command that can specify the game state (RT0 to 4, RB) of the game, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The ART state command is a command that can specify whether it is AT, whether it is ART, the number of remaining games until the specified number of games to be described later, the number of remaining games in the precursor period, and the number of remaining games of ART. When the game starts, it is transmitted after the game state command.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the internal lottery result, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts, and is transmitted after the ART state command. The internal winning command includes a first internal winning command that can specify whether or not the special combination is won, and a second internal winning command that can specify whether or not the general combination is won, After the first internal winning command is transmitted, the second internal winning command is transmitted.

  The push order command is a command that can specify the stop order, and is when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started, after the internal winning command is transmitted, and with the stop operation of each reel Each time control is performed, it is transmitted after a stop command is transmitted. In a game in which navigation notification described later is executed, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted from the start of the game, and in a game in which navigation notification described later is not executed, an advantageous stop is performed. Until the order is determined, a push order command that cannot specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted, and after a favorable stop order is determined, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted The

  Since the game state command, the ART state command, and the internal winning command are transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts, the game is started by operating the start switch 7 by receiving these commands. Can be specified.

  The freeze command is a command that can specify whether the game is controlled to a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time, or if it is controlled to the freeze state, and when the game starts And transmitted after the internal winning command is transmitted.

  The ART lottery result command is a command that can specify whether or not an ART lottery or an additional lottery to be described later is won, the number of games of the winning ART or the number of games to be added, and when the game starts, Sent after an internal winning command is transmitted in a game in which a lottery or an extra lottery is performed.

  The reel acceleration information command is a command that can specify that the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game, and is transmitted when the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game. It is also transmitted when the reel starts to rotate with the end of the freeze state. Therefore, after the start of the freeze state is specified by the freeze command, the reel acceleration information command is received and the game progresses. Not only the fact that the rotation of the reel starts but also the end of the freeze state can be specified.

  The acceleration completion command is a command that can specify that the acceleration of the reels has been completed at the start of the game. Sent when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated at a constant speed.

  The stop operation command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel. Sent every time the accompanying stop control is performed.

  The sliding frame number command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is a left reel, a middle reel, or a right reel, and the number of sliding frames to be moved from when the corresponding reel is stopped until it stops. Each time stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel is performed, the corresponding stop operation command is transmitted after being transmitted.

  The stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is a left reel, a middle reel, or a right reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel. Stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel Is transmitted after the corresponding sliding frame number command is transmitted.

  With the stop operation command, the sliding frame number command, and the stop command, it is possible to specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and accompanying the stop operation of each reel Since it is transmitted every time stop control is performed, by receiving these commands, it is possible to specify that one of the reels has been stopped and the reel to be stopped.

  The game end command is a command that can specify that the game has ended, and is transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the combination of symbols arranged on the winning line LN, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, so that the player stops the third stop reel. This is when the stop switch is pressed and released, and is transmitted after the game end command is transmitted.

  Both the game end command and the winning determination command are transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and then releases the stop switch. By receiving these commands, It is possible to specify that all operations necessary to advance one game have been completed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The stand-by command is a command indicating a transition to the stand-by state. When one game is over and the bet amount is not set and the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has passed, It is transmitted after the payout of medals by the settlement (including medals used for setting the number of bets) is completed and a payout end command is transmitted.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to an error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is sent and reset. When the error state is canceled after the operation is performed, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power interruption.

  The setting command is a command indicating the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. When the setting change state is entered, a setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is transmitted and A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is transmitted. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it can be specified that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of setting. .

  The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation command that indicates the start of setting confirmation is transmitted when entering the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation end is indicated when the setting confirmation state ends. A confirmation command is sent.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state). Before the setting can be started) and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (from on to off, from off to on).

  The operation detection command is a command indicating the detection state (on / off) of the operation switches (MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), and is transmitted at regular intervals.

  Of these commands, commands other than the operation detection command are generated in the main process, temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the subsequent command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main).

  On the other hand, the operation detection command is generated based on the detection state of the switch every time the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main) is executed 10 times, and is temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c. Then, it is transmitted in the command transmission process of the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described. When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub-control unit 91 is the earliest. Based on the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b based on the command received in the stage, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effects LEDs 52a to 52c, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55 based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. The output control of various production devices such as the above is performed. In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, and the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 for each of the plurality of types of performance patterns. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 registers the control pattern registered in correspondence with the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Of the patterns, the control pattern corresponding to the received command type is referred to, and the output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and changes to the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the sub control unit 91 stores the effect pattern in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received. As a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can provide a notification period in which navigation notification can be executed to notify the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. Can be controlled at an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT).

  When the main control unit 41 controls the AT, the main control unit 41 performs navigation notification by winning the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state, and based on the winning number of the winning navigation notification combination, the player In addition to notifying the stop order that is advantageous to the player and transmitting a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player based on the winning number to the sub-control unit 91, the liquid crystal display 51, etc. The navigation effect using is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute navigation notification and execute a navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in a normal state where the control is not performed by the AT.

  FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the main controller 41 includes a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the ROM 41b and a memory area (F000H to FFFFH) allocated to the RAM 41c.

  The memory area of the ROM 41b includes a program / data area (0000H to 26FFH) in which programs and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area (2700H to 277FH) in which arbitrary data such as a title and version of the program can be set, and a later description. Parameters for setting the hardware table of the vector table area (2780H to 27A7H) in which the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction to be executed and the start address of the timer interrupt process (main) are set, and the internal function of the main control unit 41 HW parameter area (27A8H to 27FFH) in which is set, and an unused area (2800H to 7FFFH) where access is prohibited.

  The parameters set in the HW parameter area in the ROM 41b include the final address (HPRGEND) of the ROM area used in the program / data area, the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the final address (HRAMEND) of the RAM area for which access is prohibited.

  The memory area of the RAM 41c includes a usable area (F000H to F400H) usable as a work and an internal function register area (F4B0H to F4B0H to store a group of registers for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 41. F6FFH) and unused areas (F401H to F4AFH, F700H to FFFFH) where access is prohibited.

  FIG. 7 is an address map of the program / data area in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 and the usable area in the RAM 41c.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, It includes a use area 1, a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, and an unused area 2. .

  The progress of the game is to advance a series of processes constituting the game. In the case of a slot machine, the stage where the game can be started by setting the number of bets is started and the reel is rotated. A step of stopping the reel, a step of deriving a display result, and a step of assigning a value such as a medal according to the display result.

  A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are allocated separately, and are allocated backward in the storage area of the ROM 41b among the game program area and the non-program area. Since the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more is allocated to the area before the non-program area, a storage area for the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not related to the progress of the game It can be easily specified according to the difference.

  The game program area and the game data area, the non-game program area and the non-game data area are allocated to continuous areas, respectively, while the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game are not related to the progress of the game. Since the game program and the non-game data area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more, the game program area and game data area related to the progress of the game, and the progress of the game Non-game programs and non-game data areas that are not involved can be easily specified according to the difference in storage areas.

  In the above description, before and after the storage area is a magnitude relationship between the address values assigned to the storage area. The smaller address is the front and the larger address is the rear. For this reason, the storage area allocated behind the one storage area corresponds to the storage area having an address value larger than that of the one storage area, and the storage area allocated ahead of the one storage area. This corresponds to a storage area having an address value smaller than that of one storage area.

  Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a game program is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area is allocated before the game program allocated behind the non-game program area. A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  Further, the game program area and the non-game program area may be assigned to areas adjacent to each other with the unused area 1 in between, and even in such a structure, the game program area related to the progress of the game Therefore, it is possible to easily identify a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game according to the difference in storage area.

  In addition, in the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, since 0 values are stored in all areas, a game program area and game data area, a non-game program area and non-game data, The unused areas 1 and 2 can be easily distinguished from each other, and even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, they can be easily found.

  It should be noted that 1 may be stored in all of the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b. Even in such a configuration, the game program area, the game data area, and the non-game The program area and non-game data can be easily distinguished from the unused areas 1 and 2 and can be easily detected even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2. .

  Further, as long as the game program area and the non-game program area are assigned to separate areas, the game program area and the non-game program area may be assigned to adjacent areas. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily identify a game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game according to the difference in the storage areas.

  The game program area and the non-game program area both start from an address (0H) having the same lower 4 digits when the address is expressed in binary, and the program / data area of the ROM 41b. Among them, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program area not related to the progress of the game can be easily distinguished from other areas.

  In addition, both the game program area and the non-game program area not only start from an address having the same low-order 4 digit value when the address is expressed in binary, but also the low-order 1 digit value when expressed in hexadecimal. Starts from the same 0 address (0H), so that not only when the address is expressed in binary, but also when it is expressed in hexadecimal, the game program area and the non-game program area are easily distinguished from other areas. can do.

  It should be noted that both the game program area and the non-game program area start from an address having the same value in the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) regardless of whether the address is expressed in binary or hexadecimal. With this configuration, the game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas. For example, the value of the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits is the same 1 The same effect can be obtained with a configuration starting from the address.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used as a work by the non-game program, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which the game program saves data, and the non-game RAM area includes a game An area where the program can be referred to, an area where the game program cannot be referred to, and a non-game stack area where the non-game program saves data are included. In the present embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas. However, the game stack area and the non-game program may be provided with a single stack area.

  The unused area 3 is an area in which neither a game program nor a non-game program is used, and is an area that is redundant with respect to a game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

  The unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more in which neither a game program nor a non-game program is used. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 4, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-related not related to the progress of the game The non-game RAM area used by the game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage areas.

  Hereinafter, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-game area. . Further, the unused area 1 and the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

  Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 permits access in the usable area of the RAM 41c when an access is prohibited in the program / data area of the ROM 41b. When there is an access to an area that is not set to, when there is an access to an area other than the program / data area in the ROM 41b, and when there is an access to an area other than the usable area in the RAM 41c, In other words, when an access is made to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation, an illegal access reset is generated to disable the progress of the game. Therefore, an unused area of the ROM 41b or an area unrelated to the operation If an illegal program is stored in an unused area of the RAM 41c, etc. Even, it is possible to prevent illegal program from being executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and before the non-game program area behind the game program area. An unused area 1 is assigned to the area, and a group including an area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While the access to the area (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area) is collectively set to be permitted, the other areas, that is, the program / data area of the game program, game data, non-game program, Non-game data is not stored Because it is forbidden access to the area later than trick data, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

  In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Are allocated to a group of areas including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Thus, while the permission is set, even if access to other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by an unauthorized program or unauthorized data.

  A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, an unused area 1 is allocated to an area before the non-game program area behind the game program area, and a program / data Out of the areas, a group of areas including the game program area (area from the game program area to the game data area), a group of areas including the non-game program (area from the non-game program area to the non-game data area) A configuration may be adopted in which access is set to permit and access to other areas is prohibited. Even in such a configuration, a game program or a non-game program is not stored in the program / data area. Access is prohibited, so the intent of unauthorized programs and unauthorized data Can be prevented without control will take place. In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Of the program / data area including the game program area (the area from the game program area to the game data area), and the area including the non-game program (from the non-game program area to the non-game area). (Access to the data area) may be set to permit, and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, a game program or non-game in the program / data area Access to an area where no program is stored Because There is inhibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

  In the above description, the area where access is permitted is set in the program / data area. However, by setting the area where access is prohibited in the program / data area, the area where access is indirectly permitted is set. It is good also as a structure made.

  Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 executes the user program when the user program is executed in an area other than the designated area where the program travel is permitted, that is, in a normal operation. When the user program is executed in an unoccupied area, the IAT circuit 506a outputs an IAT generation signal to disable the progress of the game. Therefore, the unused area of the ROM 41b and the area unrelated to the operation, the unallocated area of the RAM 41c Even if an unauthorized program is stored in the use area or the like, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and before the non-game program area behind the game program area. The unused area 1 is assigned to the area, and the IAT circuit 506a permits the program running for each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While it is set as a designated area, program running in other areas, that is, areas that do not store gaming programs or non-gaming programs in the program / data area is prohibited. Control line It can be prevented been.

  In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area And the IAT circuit 506a sets each of the game program area and the non-game program area of the program / data area as a designated area that permits program running based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Thus, even if the program running in other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control due to unauthorized programs and unauthorized data.

  A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, an unused area 1 is allocated to an area before the non-game program area behind the game program area, and an HW parameter area. Based on the parameters set in the above, a group of areas including the area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area (area from the game program area to the non-game data area) For example, the IAT circuit 506a may be set as a designated area for permitting program running at once and the program running in other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, the program / data area Of which game programs and non-game programs are stored Since the program running in the absence area is prohibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data. In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, a group of areas (from the game program area) including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program in the program / data area. Even if the IAT circuit 506a is collectively set as a designated area for permitting program running and the program running in other areas is prohibited, the area up to the non-game data area) Unintended control It can be prevented been.

  In the above description, the program / data area is configured to set the area that permits the program travel. However, the program / data area allows the program travel to be indirectly permitted by setting the area that prohibits the program travel. A configuration may be adopted in which an area is set.

  The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program, and a subroutine that is called during execution of another program.

  Also, a CALL instruction is included as an instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to execute a program stored in the program / data area.

  The CALL instruction is an instruction for calling and executing a subroutine stored at an address designated in the main routine or the subroutine. When calling the subroutine by the CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the call source address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the designated address. After the subroutine is finished, the caller address stored in the stack area, that is, the caller main routine or subroutine program that executed the CALL instruction is returned.

  The CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. The normal CALL instruction is an instruction that specifies a high-order address and a low-order address to specify both the high-order address and the low-order address and calls a subroutine while the CALLV instruction specifies only the low-order address. As a result, the subroutine is called by specifying the address by the upper address preset in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and the designated lower address, and the subroutine is called with a smaller amount of data than the normal CALL instruction. It becomes possible.

  The RST instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to a specified value by specifying a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses. Subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data than instructions and CALLV instructions. When calling the subroutine by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the caller's address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specific address corresponding to the designated value. After the subroutine is finished, the caller address stored in the stack area, that is, the caller main routine or subroutine that executed the RST instruction is returned to.

  The jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in the main routine or subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction and executes the destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction or the RST instruction, even if the program after the movement ends, the program does not return to the movement source program.

  The main control unit 41 includes an LD command as a command for reading data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction for reading data stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine into a specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

  Among the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines that are particularly frequently used are stored in an area of the game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, a specific value is set in the vector table area of the ROM 41b as an upper address of a subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. The main control unit 41 specifies only the lower address using the CALLV instruction when calling a subroutine in which the upper address of the head address has a specific value, thereby specifying the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. The lower address specified as the lower address is specified, and the subroutine stored in the address including the upper and lower addresses is called and executed. For this reason, an upper address that constitutes a part of an address used when calling a subroutine that is used frequently in the game program is set in the vector table in advance as a specific value, and is based on the specific value set in the vector table. Since the address is specified, it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both an upper address and a lower address, and when calling these subroutines It is possible to reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address.

  Of the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines that are used frequently are stored in the non-game program area of the ROM 41b in the area where the start address is a specific value, and the CALLV instruction is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. When a specific value is set as an upper address of a subroutine to be called at the time, and the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the top address is a specific value, only the lower address is specified by using the CALLV instruction. Even if it is configured to call and execute, subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both upper and lower addresses. When calling It is possible to reduce the waste of program for specifying the address.

  In addition, the upper address used when calling with the CALLV instruction may be set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

  In addition to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using a value stored in the vector table area, a value set in a specific register, etc. If a special CALL instruction that enables the storage address to be specified is used, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for designating an address when calling a subroutine. In addition, identification values having a data amount smaller than the addresses are assigned to the plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, the storage addresses of the subroutines are set in the plurality of areas, and the identification values are designated, thereby identifying the areas. Even in a configuration that uses a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify a storage address of a subroutine stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for designating an address when the subroutine is called. .

  In addition, among the game data stored in the ROM 41b, game data that is frequently used is stored in the game data area of the ROM 41b in an area where the head address is a specific value, and a special LD is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the data to be read by the instruction, and when the main control unit 41 calls game data in which the upper address of the top address becomes the specific value, only the lower address is specified by using a special LD instruction. Even when it is configured to read out these game data, it becomes possible to call game data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD command that reads out data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. When wasting game data, the program for specifying the address is wasted It can be reduced.

  In addition, among the non-game data stored in the ROM 41b, non-game data that is frequently used is stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b in the area where the head address is a specific value, and in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, When a specific value is set as an upper address of data read by a special LD instruction and the main control unit 41 calls non-game data whose upper address of the head address is a specific value, only the lower address is used by using a special LD instruction. Even if it is configured to read these non-game data by designating, the non-game data is called with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction that designates both the upper address and the lower address and reads data. It is possible to specify the address when reading these non-game data. It is possible to reduce the waste of lamb.

  Even in these cases, the upper address used when calling with a special LD instruction may be set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

  Also, a part of the address is specified using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in a specific register, etc., and the data storage address can be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address If the configuration uses a special LD instruction, the waste of a program for designating an address when reading data can be reduced. In addition, identification values with a data amount smaller than the addresses are assigned to the plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, the data storage addresses are set in the plurality of areas, and the identification values are designated to identify the areas. Even in a configuration using a special LD instruction that can specify the storage address of data stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address when reading data .

  The main control unit 41 is activated when a system reset by inputting a system reset signal, a WDT reset by the WDT 506b, or the aforementioned illegal access reset occurs. At this time, the value set in the vector table area, that is, The upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main) are values indicating the area where the program or the like is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH (in the unused vector table area) If the value set in the vector table area is neither a value indicating that the program is outside the area nor FFFFH, it will not start. An unintended process may be executed due to an interrupt. In advance it can be prevented.

  The game program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless the process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, a non-game program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and even when the game program is called to return to the game program without executing processing based on the program, the game can be advanced. It is a program for executing processing.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the game program includes a game dedicated program included only in the game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program included in both the game program and the non-game program.

  The game-dedicated program includes, for example, a game start waiting process, an internal lottery process, a reel control process, a game end setting process, an external output 1 process, an initial setting process, a power interruption process, an abnormal winning determination process, and an error process. In the game start waiting process, after the control of one game is completed, the bet number is set by inserting medals, etc., and after the prescribed number of bets is set, the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The internal lottery process is a process of performing an internal lottery and setting a winning flag, etc., and the reel control process starts the rotation of the reels, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. In the game end setting process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred according to the stop position of the stopped reel, and medals are paid out, re-game is set, and the game state is set. The external output 1 process is a process for performing output control of the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the RT signal among the external output signals. First The setting process is a process for making the game possible when the power is turned on (confirm backup error, register initialization, etc.), and the power interruption process can return to the state before the power interruption after the power interruption occurs. The abnormal winning determination process is a process for determining whether or not an abnormal winning in which an unacceptable combination wins has occurred, and the error processing is performed for various abnormalities (medal insertion). Abnormality, foreign object detection in medal selector 29, reel rotation abnormality, medal payout abnormality, foreign object detection near payout exit, RAM abnormality, set value abnormality, hopper tank 34a empty, overflow tank 35 full detection, abnormal winning etc. ) Is a process for disabling the game when it is detected. In addition, although not particularly illustrated, the game program includes processing related to the above-described AT (a lottery related to AT, control related to navigation notification, and the like).

  The common determination program in the game program includes, for example, an input determination process and a payout determination process. The insertion determination process is a process for determining whether or not the medal is normally passed by the inserted medal sensor 31, and is a process executed in a state where a medal can be inserted for setting a bet amount. The payout determination process is a process for determining whether or not the medal is normally passed by the payout sensor 34c, and is a process executed in a state where the payout of the medal is permitted at the time of winning a small role or at the time of credit settlement. It is.

  The common general-purpose program in the game program is a process that is called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the game program. For example, a counter update process, a port input process, a data conversion process, an LED display process, a data setting process, Includes command setting processing. The counter update process is a process for updating the designated counter value, the port input process is a process for acquiring the input state of the designated port, and the data conversion process is input using game data. Is a process for converting and outputting the data, the LED display process is a process for setting the specified value to be displayed on the LED, and the data setting process is a process for setting the specified data, The command setting process is a process for setting a specified command in the command queue.

  In particular, the game program, when an abnormality is detected as described above, the release condition corresponding to the type of abnormality (in the case of random number abnormality, RAM abnormality, backup abnormality, setting value abnormality, resetting of the setting value, In the case of an abnormality other than the above, error processing is included that disables the progress of the game until a reset operation is established.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the non-game program includes a non-game dedicated program included only in the non-game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program that are the same as the game program.

  Non-game dedicated programs include, for example, test signal output processing, foreign object detection processing, door monitoring processing, external output 2 processing, inserted medal error determination processing, payout medal error determination processing, power failure determination processing, normal time command transmission processing, power interruption Includes time command transmission processing. The test signal output process is a process for outputting a test signal generated in relation to the game result, and the foreign object detection process is a process for detecting a foreign object in the medal path by the insertion port sensor 26. The door monitoring process is a process for detecting the opening of the front door 1b, and the external output 2 process is a security signal (door open signal, setting change signal, input error signal, payout error signal) among external output signals. The inserted medal error determination process is a process for performing output control. Based on the detection status of the inserted medal sensor 31, the inserted medal backflow detection, the medal clogging detection in the medal selector 29, and the foreign object detection in the medal selector 29 are performed. The payout medal error determination process is based on the detection status of the payout sensor 34c, and the medal detection near the payout exit The power failure determination process is a process for determining whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected, and is a normal time command. The transmission process is a process for transmitting one command set first in the command queue to the sub-control unit 91 among the commands set in the command queue by the command setting process of the game dedicated program and the non-game dedicated program. The power interruption command transmission process is a process for transmitting all commands set in the command queue to the sub-control unit 91.

  The common general-purpose program in the non-game program is a process that is called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the non-game program.For example, the counter update process, the port input process, Includes data conversion processing, LED display processing, data setting processing, and command setting processing.

  The non-game program includes processing for determining whether or not a predetermined detection status is based on the detection status of detection means (the slot sensor 26, the full sensor 35a, and the door opening detection switch 25) that are not involved in the progress of the game.

  In addition, the non-game program functions as a detection means related to the progress of a game in a specific control state among a plurality of control states (game start waiting process, internal lottery process, reel control process, game end time setting process). In other control states, the detection means (for example, the inserted medal sensor 31 and the payout sensor 34c) functioning as detection means not related to the progress of the game is based on the detection state in the control state not related to the progress of the game. A process for determining whether or not a predetermined detection status is present (for example, a inserted medal detection process or a payout medal detection process for detecting an abnormality caused by detecting the insertion of a medal during reel rotation or the payout of a medal) Including. Such a determination process corresponds to the common determination program because it is the same process as the process for determining whether or not the game program is in a predetermined detection status based on the detection status in the control state related to the progress of the game. .

  Of the processes included in the game program, the external output 1 process, the process of counting the number of medals inserted in the game start waiting process, the process of switching the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the number of medals paid out in the game end setting process Processing that does not directly relate to the progress of the game, such as counting, processing for detecting that the hopper tank 34a is empty, processing for updating software random numbers, processing related to AT, transmission processing for internal winning commands, etc. If so, a configuration in which all or part of these processes are included in the non-game program may be employed. On the other hand, as long as the processes included in the non-game program are indirectly related to the progress of the game, all or a part of these processes may be included in the game program.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls a non-game program in the process based on the game program, executes the process based on the non-game program, and ends the process based on the non-game program. Return to the processing based on the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a, in principle, executes the process based on the game program with reference to the game data in the game data area and uses the game RAM area as a work when executing the process based on the game program. The contents of the game RAM area can be referred to and updated. Further, the CPU 41a, in principle, executes processing based on the non-game program by referring to the game data in the non-game data area, and uses the non-game RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-game RAM area.

  Further, the CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area when executing processing based on the game program, but can refer to the non-game RAM area. In executing the processing based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

  In addition, the process based on the game program can be referred to only a specific area necessary for the game program in the non-game RAM area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection). In the processing based on the game RAM area, only specific areas required for the non-game program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) can be referred to. In addition, a specific area in the non-game RAM area where the process based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area in the game RAM area where the process based on the non-game program can be referred to may be assigned to a continuous address area. However, a configuration in which part or all of the address areas are allocated to non-contiguous address areas may be used.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a game data area in which game data referred to by the game program is readable and stored, and work data referred to by the game program Is a game RAM area that is stored so as to be readable and writable, a program that is called by the game program, a non-game program area that stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game that is referenced by the non-game program Since a non-game data area in which data is stored in a readable manner and a non-game RAM area in which work data referred to by the non-game program are stored in a readable and writable manner are separately allocated, a game program, Game data and work program work data; Game program, the workpiece data of the non game data and non-game program, can be easily identified according to a difference in the storage area.

  In addition, by dividing the game program area and the game data area from the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied by the ROM 41b can be managed in a compact manner according to each function. It becomes easier to specify the corresponding data.

  Further, in this embodiment, when executing the game program, it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area, and when executing the non-game program, it is possible to refer to the game RAM area. In executing the game program, the data used by the non-game program can be easily used, and in executing the non-game program, the data used by the game program can be used easily. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and it is impossible to update the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. Does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

  Further, in this embodiment, the processing based on the game program can be referred to only a specific area required for the game program in the non-game RAM area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection). The processing based on the non-gaming program can be referred to only specific areas (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-gaming program in the gaming RAM area. Therefore, since the data that can be referred to by the game program in the non-game RAM area and the data that can be referred to by the non-game program are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program can be easily specified. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can call a non-game program from the process based on the game program during the execution of the main process. As shown, it is possible to call a non-game program from a process based on the game program during the execution of the timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), when calling a non-game program from a main process based on a game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area, and performs a common call process. 1 is executed. The common call process 1 is a process included in the game program. In the common call process 1, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area and the stack pointer (SP, an address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is stored. Is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and the timer master permission flag is set to a value indicating that the interrupt is prohibited by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag, and then set to a specific area. Call the non-game program at the address.

  On the other hand, based on the called non-game program, the stack pointer (non-SP, address indicating the current position of the non-game stack area) of the non-game program is set and the process of the non-game program is executed. Thereafter, the game program of the caller, that is, the common call process 1 is restored.

  After returning to the common call process 1, the common call process 1 releases the prohibition of the timer interrupt by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating the permission of the interrupt, and saves the game stack area and the SP. Based on the data saved in the area, the register and the stack pointer of the game program are returned to the state before calling the non-game program, and the process ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game program calls the non-game program, the interrupt is prohibited by the common call processing 1 and when returning from the non-game program to the game program, Since the prohibition is released, it is possible to set the interrupt to be prohibited over a period during which the non-game program is being executed.

  In addition, when a non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the non-game program first disables interrupts and then executes various processes. The configuration may be such that the prohibition of the interrupt is canceled, and by adopting such a configuration, the interrupt can be set to be prohibited during the period during which the non-game program is executed, as in the present embodiment. In addition, since the prohibition and cancellation of interrupts are set by a non-game program, it is not necessary to set and cancel the prohibition of interrupts in the common call processing 1 of the game program, and the capacity of the game program can be reduced. .

  As shown in FIG. 10B, when a non-game program is called from a timer interrupt process based on a game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area, Call process 2 is executed. In the common call process 2, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, the address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then specified. Call the non-game program at the address set in the area.

  On the other hand, the called non-game program sets the stack pointer of the non-game program, executes the process of the non-game program, and then returns to the common call process 2 of the caller.

  After returning to the common call process 2, the common call process 2 returns the register and the stack pointer of the game program to the state before calling the non-game program based on the data saved in the game stack area and the SP save area. Return and exit.

  As described above, in the common call process 2, unlike the call common process 1, the timer interrupt is not set to be prohibited or released. However, as described above, the main control unit 41 performs other interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Since the execution of the interruption process is prohibited, the interruption can be prohibited over the period during which the non-game program is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the game program executes the common call process 1 and the common call process 2 to call the non-game program and execute the non-game program. Regardless of whether or not there is, processing to save and protect all areas of the register is performed, so when returning to the game program, it is possible to reliably return from the state when the non-game program was called .

  In addition, without executing the common call process 1 and the common call process 2, the value of the register used by the game program immediately before calling the non-game program from the process based on the game program in the game program is protected. After all the processing based on the above is completed, the protected register value may be restored at the initial stage of returning to the game program. With such a configuration, the register is called before the non-game program is called. Since the protection process is performed and the register restoration process is performed after the return from the non-game program, the data stored in the register by the non-game program does not affect the game program.

  In addition, when a non-game program is called, the non-game program first saves the stack pointer and register of the game program, and returns the stack pointer and register of the game program to the end of the non-game program. With this configuration, as in this embodiment, when returning to the game program, it is possible to reliably return from the state when the non-game program is called, Capacity can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a timer interrupt process (main) that is executed by interrupting the main process at a constant interval (interval of about 0.56 ms). The timer interrupt process (main) is a process executed by an interrupt generated according to the count of the timer circuit 509. The address at which the program of the timer interrupt process (main) is stored is a vector table. It is set as a value corresponding to the timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, processing from that address is executed. Further, other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (main).

  In the present embodiment, the timer interruption process (main) is included in the game program, while the power interruption determination process, power interruption command transmission process, normal time command transmission process executed in the timer interruption process (main), The door monitoring process is included in the non-game program, and the main control unit 41 sets the prohibition of interrupt in the timer interrupt process (main), and saves the stack pointer and the register of the game program. The non-gaming program is called. Also, when returning from these non-game programs to timer interrupt processing (main), the stack pointer and registers of the game program are returned to the state before the call of the non-game program, and the subsequent processing is performed. It is supposed to run. Since the main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of the interrupt process, the subsequent process is executed in the interrupt disabled state even after returning from the non-game program. To do.

  In addition, a power failure determination process, a power interruption command transmission process, a normal time command transmission process, and a door monitoring process that are non-game programs executed in the timer interrupt process (main) need to be executed before these non-game programs. Processing other than certain processing (for example, port input processing and motor phase signal output processing that need to be executed before the branching of the timer interrupt), that is, whether it is performed before or after the non-game program has an effect on control. It is supposed to run before no processing.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. It is possible to execute a main process based on a program and interrupt a main process at a predetermined time interval to execute a timer interrupt process (main) based on a game program. It is also possible to call and execute a non-game program from (main).

  In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may malfunction due to the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) while the non-game program is being executed.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. It is possible to execute the main process based on the game program, interrupt the main process at every predetermined time interval, and execute the timer interrupt process (main) based on the game program. In a configuration in which a non-game program can be called and executed from the timer interrupt process (main), when calling a non-game program from the main process, When calling a non-game program from a timer interrupt process (main) while calling a non-game program, In other words, when a non-game program is called in a situation where there is a low possibility that an interrupt will occur, the non-game program is called without setting the interruption of other processes to be prohibited. It is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the prohibition of interruption while preventing malfunction due to execution of interruption.

  The timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is a process by a game program, for example, an LED dynamic display process, a control signal output process, etc., and a process by a non-game program, for example, normal time It consists of a plurality of processes including a command transmission process, a command transmission process at power interruption, etc., and a process by a predetermined game program among a plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main) In particular, since a non-game program is called before a process that can be executed before or after these non-game programs, that is, a plurality of processes constituting a timer interrupt process (main) Because the non-game program is called as early as possible, the timer interrupt processing (main) is not terminated for some reason. Even if the Ma interrupt interrupt had occurred doubly generated, it is possible to prevent the other interrupts during execution of a non-game program from being executed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a game program and a non-game program, a game stack area for saving data used by the game program, and a non-game stack area for saving data used by the non-game program Are provided separately, and the main control unit 41 saves the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program in the stack area provided separately. Management becomes easier. In particular, data used by a game program saved due to the occurrence of a timer interrupt and data used by a non-game program executed during execution of timer interrupt processing (main) are mixed and stored in one stack area. As a result, stack management is not complicated.

  When executing the non-game program, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment saves the register values used in the game program in the game stack area, and then calls the non-game program to perform processing in the non-game program. When the processing in the non-game program is completed, the saved register value is restored, so that the register value used by the game program is not changed as the non-game program is executed. it can.

  When calling a non-game program from a process based on the game program, the call common process 1 or the call common process 2 for saving the register value used in the game program to the game stack area is called. By sharing a program for executing a non-game program in processing, the program capacity can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, when the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the main process, the call common process 1 is executed, while the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the timer interrupt process. In this case, the call common process 2 different from the call common process 1 is executed to save the register value used in the game program to the game stack area. In the main process, the process based on the game program is performed. The non-game program may be called from the process based on the game program in the timer interruption process, and the common call common process may be executed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to call and execute a non-game program from the main process and from the timer interrupt process (main). When calling, set the interrupt of other processes to be prohibited and call the non-game program, while when calling the non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), disable the interrupt of other processes The main control unit 41 is configured to call a non-game program from the main process, or to call a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). It is good also as a structure which prohibits the interruption of this process.

  In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 prohibits interruption of other processes not only when calling a non-game program from the main process but also when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to interruption being executed during execution of the non-game program.

  In particular, when the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the interrupt prohibition is set, and when the timer interrupt process (main) ends, the interrupt prohibition is canceled, so that the timer interrupt process (main) Interruption of other processes will be prohibited during execution, but even in this case, when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts of other processes are prohibited again. Even when the interrupt prohibition setting is canceled due to the cause, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the interrupt being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

  In addition, when executing timer interrupt processing (main) as described above, interrupt prohibition is set, and when the timer interrupt processing (main) ends, timer prohibition is canceled, so timer interrupt processing In the configuration where interrupts of other processes are prohibited during execution of (main), but when interrupts of other processes are prohibited again when a non-game program is called from the timer interrupt process (main) By maintaining the setting of prohibition of interrupts of other processes set at the time of calling the non-game program even after the non-game program ends, the non-game is executed even while the timer interrupt process (main) is being executed. It is possible to prevent the prohibition of interrupts from being canceled by executing the program.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment initializes the game RAM area, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed at the start of the setting change process. That is, initialization 0 for initializing all areas of the usable area is performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed at the start of the setting change process, the game RAM area except the special work area, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area are initialized. That is, initialization 1 for initializing an area other than the special work in the usable area is performed.

  At the end of the setting change process, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized, that is, the special work and the game stack area in the game RAM area. Initialization 2 is performed to initialize areas other than (in use).

  Also, at the end of a specific game state and at the end of one game, initialization 3 is performed to initialize the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area.

  Also, at the end of one game, not at the end of a specific game state, initialization 4 is performed to initialize the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs initialization 0 to 4 when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and among the usable areas of the RAM 41c when the first condition is satisfied as the predetermined condition. When at least a part of the game RAM area in which data used by the game program is stored is initialized and the second condition is established as a predetermined condition, at least a part of the game RAM area and the usable area of the RAM 41c At least a part of the non-game RAM area used by the non-game program is initialized.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, as a first condition, at the end of one game, an unused area 3 and a game stack area (unused) that are a part of the game RAM area among the available areas. Is initialized, but the non-game RAM area of the usable area is not initialized. In addition, as a first condition, at the end of a specific gaming state, a general work, an unused area 3 and a game stack area (unused) that are part of the gaming RAM area among the available areas are initialized. Of the possible areas, the non-game RAM area is not initialized. Also, as the first condition, after the setting change state is finished, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) that are a part of the game RAM area among the available areas are initialized. However, the non-game RAM area in the usable area is not initialized.

  On the other hand, as a second condition, when there is no abnormality in the RAM when the setting change state is started, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3 that is a part of the game RAM area among the usable areas, The game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (used) are initialized, and all the non-game RAM areas are initialized. If the RAM is abnormal when the setting change state is started, all the game RAM areas in the usable area are initialized and all the game RAM areas are initialized.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of executing a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. A ROM 41b for storing the program is provided.

  In such a configuration, if a game program and a non-game program are mixed in one ROM 41b, it is difficult to determine which program is a program related to the progress of the game.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored. Since the areas are assigned separately, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is used as a game program work, and stores a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and a non-game program work and stores data used by the non-game program. The RAM 41c includes a non-game RAM area, and since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are separately allocated in the RAM 41c, the data used by the game program and the non-game program are used. The main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied, and can specify the data. When the initialization condition 2 is satisfied, at least a part of the game RAM area is initialized and To initialize at least a portion of the non-gaming RAM area, it is possible to initialize the appropriate data in accordance with the status of the data used by data and non-game programs used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused), which are part of the game RAM area, when the first game is completed as a first initialization condition. As a first initialization condition, when a special game state (BB) is finished and when one game is finished, a general work that is a part of the game RAM area, an unused area 3 and a game stack When the area (unused) is initialized and the setting change is completed and the main process is started as the first initialization condition, the important work and general work areas that are part of the game RAM area are not used. Since the use area 3 and the game stack area (unused) are initialized, appropriate data can be initialized according to the situation.

  In addition, as a second initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when there is no abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change, important work, general work, unused area that are part of the game RAM area 3. A game stack area (unused) and a game stack area (in use) are initialized, and among the non-game RAM areas, an area that is referenced from a game program, an area that is not referenced from a game program, and a non-game stack area ( Unused) and non-game stack areas (in use), that is, all areas of the non-game RAM area are initialized, and when there is an abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change as a second initialization condition, Among them, special work, important work, general work, unused area 3, game stack area (unused) and game stack area (in use), that is, game R In addition to initializing all areas of the M area, of the non-game RAM area, an area that is referenced from the game program, an area that is not referenced from the game program, a non-game stack area (unused), and a non-game stack area (in use) ) In other words, in order to initialize all areas of the non-game RAM area, data appropriate for the situation is initialized among data used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c and data used by the non-game program. can do.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied. What is necessary is just to initialize at least a part of the game RAM area when the initialization condition is satisfied, and it is also possible to initialize all areas of the game RAM area.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area and initialize all areas of the non-game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied. However, the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied, and initializes at least a part of the non-game RAM area. It is sufficient that all areas of the game RAM area are initialized, all areas of the non-game RAM area may be initialized, or at least a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized. It is also possible to initialize all areas of the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured as a program that initializes the game RAM area and a program that initializes the non-game RAM area as separate programs, so that the game program is stored in the non-game RAM area. Since it is not necessary to initialize, the capacity of the game program can be reduced. Further, the program for initializing the game RAM area can be shared both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Furthermore, since a program for initializing the game RAM area is provided as a game program, and a program for initializing the non-game RAM area is provided as a non-game program, the game program initializes the non-game RAM area, It is possible to prevent the game program from affecting the non-game program and the non-game program from affecting the game program without initializing the area.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the game end time process setting in the main process as the first initialization condition, and determines that it is not the end of the specific game state, that is, one game is ended. When the game ends, the start address of the initialization target RAM is set, and a predetermined area of the game RAM area is initialized by executing the game area initialization process, so that the game progresses for each game unit. A part of the unnecessary game RAM area can be initialized.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is activated when the setting key switch 37 is ON and starts the setting change process, that is, the second initialization condition is established based on the setting change operation being performed. The game area initialization process is executed to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization process is executed to initialize the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. Thus, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area can be initialized based on a game store clerk setting change operation (initialization operation).

  The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of this embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on a game program or when performing control based on a non-game program, and the first initialization condition Since the unused area 3 is initialized both when and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored in the unused area 3.

  In this embodiment, the unused area 3 is initialized both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, but at least when the first initialization condition is satisfied. If the configuration is such that the unused area 3 is initialized when either one of the conditions when the second initialization condition is satisfied, illegal data can be prevented from being stored in the unused area 3. If the first initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions, invalid data is stored in the unused area 3 if the unused area 3 is initialized when at least one of the conditions is satisfied. Can be prevented. The same applies even if the second initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is used as a game program work, a game RAM area that stores data used by the game program, and a non-game program work that is used as a non-game program work. A RAM 41c including a game RAM area, and the RAM 41c is configured to retain data stored in the RAM 41c for a predetermined period even when power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped by a backup power source. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 starts, the control unit 41 starts an initial setting process, and whether or not the storage content of the RAM is normal based on the data stored in the RAM 41c held by the backup power source. The data stored in the RAM 41c is determined to be normal. Resume control based on.

  In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, whether the storage contents of the RAM are normal based on the data stored in both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. When this is determined, the load when the control is resumed based on the data stored in the RAM 41c becomes excessive.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment starts the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and the RAM in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c held by the backup power source. It is determined whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the parity and the destructive diagnosis data stored in the game RAM area, and if it is determined to be normal, the data stored in the game RAM area and the non-game Control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM area, and whether or not the non-game data stored in the non-game RAM area and that does not interfere with the game progress is normal. By omitting the determination, it is possible to reduce the load at the time of resuming the control while ensuring that the game can proceed normally.

  The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of this embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on a game program or when performing control based on a non-game program. The unit 41 executes an initial setting process when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, calculates a RAM parity of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the initial setting process, and calculates the calculated RAM Since it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the game RAM area are normal based on the parity, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored in the unused area 3.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes an initial setting process when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and determines whether or not the storage content of the RAM 41c is destroyed in the initial setting process. When it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, the RAM abnormality flag is set to control the error processing, and thereafter the error state is maintained without being automatically restored, while the setting key switch 36 When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started in the state of ON, control is made to the setting change process, the game area initialization process is executed to initialize the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization The process is executed to initialize the non-game RAM area, that is, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized when the error state is canceled. While game any abnormality has occurred in the RAM area and the non gaming RAM area can be prevented from proceeding.

  When the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the initial setting process when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 sets a RAM abnormality flag. Then, when the setting key switch 36 is ON, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started and the setting change process is executed. The main control unit 41 is configured to initialize both the RAM area and the non-game RAM area, but when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the initial setting process. When it is determined that the game RAM area is determined, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized and controlled to error processing. In such a configuration, when controlling to error processing, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized, so that either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area is abnormal as in this embodiment. It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with the occurrence of In addition, when it is determined that the storage contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized both when the setting change process is executed thereafter. Even with the configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the power interruption process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power interruption detection circuit 48 detects a decrease in the power supply voltage. In the power interruption process, the RAM 41c Access to both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area is prohibited by prohibiting access to the non-game RAM area that is not subject to determination as to whether or not the data is destroyed at the next startup. Thus, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored.

  Next, the main control unit 41 detects an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game (for example, an abnormality caused by detecting insertion or withdrawal of a medal during reel rotation, or insertion of a medal during a payout process). Control when outputting a security signal in the case of detecting an abnormality) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Insertion errors during the reel control process and the payout process are, for example, when a foreign object is inserted from the medal slot 4, when a foreign object exists in the medal flow path, and during the reel control process and the payout process. Regardless, it is detected when a medal inserted from the medal slot 4 flows down to the hopper tank 34a. Further, a payout error during the reel control process is detected when a medal is paid out when it is not the payout timing.

  In FIG. 12A, the start operation, the reel rotation start, the first stop, the second stop, the third stop, and the payout indicate respective timings during the game progress. Specifically, the start operation indicates the timing when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The reel rotation start indicates the timing at which the reels 2L, 2C, 2R start to rotate. The first stop indicates a timing at which a stop operation that is first performed in a state where all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are still rotating is detected. The second stop indicates the timing when the rotation of any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has already stopped and the two reels are rotating, that is, the second stop operation is detected. The third stop indicates a state in which the rotation of two reels has already stopped and one reel is rotating, that is, the third stop operation is detected. The payout indicates the timing at which the medal payout process is performed.

  The abnormality detection indicates a timing at which an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected. The medal payout detection indicates the timing at which the payout medal is detected by the payout sensor 34c. The medal OUT signal is a signal indicating that one medal has been paid out by outputting one pulse. The security signal indicates an output status of a signal (for example, an insertion error signal or a payout error signal) indicating that an abnormality that does not prevent the progress of the game has occurred.

  FIG. 12 (a) shows an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game during the reel control process, and a medal payout detection, medal OUT signal, and security signal output when a winning with a medal payout occurs. It is the figure which showed timing. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, when an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected during the reel control process, a security signal is not output immediately after the abnormality is detected, but after the payout process is completed. The security signal is output before the output of the medal OUT signal is completed. Thereby, it is possible to recognize medals paid out in a situation where an abnormality has occurred during the reel control process. That is, it is possible to recognize the game value given in the situation where an abnormality has occurred.

  Also, as conventionally known, when an abnormality is detected during a game when an abnormality is detected during the game, if an abnormality signal is output after the processing related to the game is completed, an `` abnormality during game '' Cannot distinguish “abnormalities immediately after the game ends”. However, in this embodiment, when an abnormality is detected at a predetermined timing within a period from the start of the game to the end of the provision of the game medium, the medal OUT signal is output after the end of the provision of the game medium. Start outputting security signals before completion. Thereby, for example, a hall computer of an amusement shop analyzed the output timing of the medal OUT signal and the security signal collected by the collecting unit, and the security signal was output before the output of the medal OUT signal was completed. By detecting this, it is possible to distinguish “abnormality in game” instead of “abnormality immediately after game”.

  In FIG. 12A, the medal OUT signal is output after the payout process is completed. For example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the medal OUT is detected every time a medal payout is detected. A signal may be output. Even in such a case, if the output of the security signal is started before the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, for example, the output of the medal OUT signal corresponding to the detection of the last medal payout is detected. The output of the security signal may be started at the timing.

  Next, the control contents of the timer counter update process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the present embodiment, the value of the timer counter assigned to the RAM 41c is periodically updated to become a specific value (0), thereby specifying the passage of time. Conventionally, when measuring multiple types of time intervals, timer values are set and updated within multiple types of processing that require timekeeping, and each type of program for updating multiple types of timer values is processed. Since it is necessary to provide it inside, it was a factor which increased program capacity. In addition, since multiple types of timer counters are assigned as data groups for each process used, it is necessary to read out the values of unrelated addresses in order to update all of them in one process. there were.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, an area in which a plurality of types of timer counter values are stored is set to an area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule in the RAM 41c, and the timer value stored in the designated address is Since multiple types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing the update process while changing the specified address for the area where multiple types of timer counter values are stored by adding a constant to the current specified address Thus, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where each of the processes for designating a plurality of types of addresses and updating the values of the addresses is performed in each process.

  Multiple types of timers can be obtained by repeatedly executing the process of updating the timer value stored at the specified address while changing the specified address for the area where the multiple types of timer counter values are stored by performing a predetermined calculation. Any configuration may be used as long as the value is updated. For example, by adding a constant to the current designated address, multiple types can be obtained by repeatedly executing while changing the designated address for an area in which multiple types of timer counter values are stored. The timer value may be updated, or a value corresponding to the number of processes with respect to the reference address (for example, for a 1-byte counter, +1 for the number of processes 1, +1 for the number of processes 2, and the number of processes While changing the designated address for the area where multiple types of timer counter values are stored by adding or subtracting +3 ...) for 3 Ri may be configured to update a plurality of types of the timer value by return run.

  Further, only for some of the timer counters provided in the main control unit 41, a process of setting a timer value in an area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule in the RAM 41c and updating the timer value stored in the designated address, A configuration in which a plurality of types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing a predetermined calculation while changing a designated address for an area in which a plurality of types of timer values are stored may be employed.

  In this embodiment, a separate timer counter is provided for each type of period to be measured. For example, a single timer counter may be shared for a plurality of types of periods in which the measurement periods do not overlap.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the process according to the timer interruption process (main) for periodically performing a predetermined process regardless of the progress of the game and the progress of the game. A main process that performs different processes in stages, and the main control unit 41 sets an initial value to the timer counter when a timing condition is satisfied in the main process, and a plurality of types of timer interrupt processes (main) The timer value is updated, and it is not necessary to provide a process for updating multiple types of timer values in each process constituting the main process, so the program capacity for updating multiple types of timer values is reduced. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed by periodically interrupting the main process. However, in the timer interrupt process periodically performed, it is determined in advance regardless of the progress of the game. The main control unit 41 may be configured to perform both a periodic process for performing the processed process and a main process for performing a process that varies stepwise depending on the progress of the game. By setting an initial value to the timer counter when the timing condition is satisfied in the process and updating multiple types of timer values in the periodic process, multiple types of timer values are set in each process constituting the main process. Since it is not necessary to provide a process for updating, it is possible to reduce the program capacity related to updating of a plurality of types of timer values.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the time counter update process, the value of the address is updated on condition that the value of the designated address is not 0, and the timer value is updated to an abnormal value. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the time counter update process, the number of processes equal to the number of timer counters to be updated is set, and the process of updating the timer value is repeatedly executed for the set number of processes. The number of timer counters to be updated can be easily set. For example, when a plurality of types of timer counters having different update intervals are provided, the type of timer value to be updated can be arbitrarily set according to the number of processes to be set. it can.

  Note that the number of processes, that is, the number of timer counters to be updated may be set in a program, or values set in a table may be read and set.

  In addition, the timer counter to be updated last is set in advance without setting the number of processes at the beginning, and the timer value is updated repeatedly until the address of the timer counter is reached. It is also possible to store a specific end value (for example, FFh) at the next address of the timer counter, and to repeatedly execute the process of updating the timer value until the value read from the specified address becomes the specific end value. good.

  In this embodiment, a 1-byte timer counter and a 2-byte timer counter are provided, and a process for updating a 1-byte timer value and a process for updating a 2-byte timer value are separately provided. Therefore, the capacity of the program and the capacity occupied by the timer value in the RAM 41c can be reduced as compared with the case where the process of updating the 1-byte timer value and the process of updating the 2-byte timer value are made common.

  In this embodiment, a relatively long time corresponding to an initial value exceeding 1 byte is measured by providing a 2-byte timer counter. For example, a timer counter having a different update interval, for example, a timer, is used. Interrupt processing (main) By providing a first timer counter that is updated once every four times and a second timer counter that is updated once every fourteen times, a relative value can be obtained without providing a 2-byte counter. It is also possible to employ a configuration for measuring a long time interval. By doing so, it is not necessary to provide a process for updating a 1-byte timer value and a process for updating a 2-byte timer value. It is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the update.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of timer counters are assigned to special works that are not initialized in accordance with the progress of the game in the RAM 41c, and are not initialized in accordance with the progress of the game. Regardless of the progress of the game, it is possible to measure the time spanning the timing when a part of the RAM 41c is initialized in accordance with the progress of the game.

  In particular, in this embodiment, not only the timer counter that may cross the timing when the measurement period ends in one game, that is, the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized as the game progresses, Since the timer counter that does not cross over the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress is stored in the area assigned to the special work together with other timer counters, the timer counter can be easily managed. In addition, a timer counter that does not cross over the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game is set, and a timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized at the measurement period according to the progress of the game. The usage of the timer counter can be easily changed by a later design change, such as changing to a timer counter that may straddle. It can be. In addition, as described above, if a single timer counter is shared for a plurality of types of periods in which measurement periods do not overlap, the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized may be crossed as the game progresses. It is possible to measure the measurement period and the measurement period that does not cross the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized in accordance with the progress of the game with one timer counter.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment may perform reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in a normal game based on the reel effect flag when a later-described reel effect flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Reel effects that vary in a special variation mode (for example, predetermined symbol alignment, reel micro-vibration, reverse reel rotation, reel low-speed rotation, and some reels rotate while others do not rotate) However, by changing the reels in these special modes, the situation is advantageous to the player (for example, being controlled by ART described later, possibility of winning in ART lottery, possibility of winning predetermined role) It is possible to suggest. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of first reel effects and second reel effects can be executed as the reel effects.

  The first reel effect is an effect that stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at specific positions, that is, an effect that aligns a predetermined symbol with the winning line LN. In this embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are used as the first reel effect. After a slight vibration for a predetermined period, the red 7-aligned production that stops by aligning “red 7-red 7-red 7” on the winning line LN, and after the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are slightly vibrated for a predetermined period. , And a blue 7 uniform production to stop by aligning “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” on the winning line LN.

  The second reel effect is an effect that does not stop the reel at a specific position. In the present embodiment, as the second reel effect, a reel fine vibration that causes the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to vibrate over a predetermined period is performed. A micro-vibration effect, a reverse rotation effect in which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reversely rotated for a predetermined period in a direction opposite to the rotation direction in the normal game, and a reel 2L, 2C, and 2R in a normal game And a low-speed rotation effect that rotates at a low speed slower than the rotation speed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is controlled by ART (RT0 is controlled by AT at RT0) when a predetermined lottery role (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is won in the internal lottery. ART lottery to determine whether or not to control. In the ART lottery, the proportion according to the type of the predetermined lottery target that has been won (in this embodiment, the common bell, the weak cherry, the watermelon, and the strong cherry are set so that the winning proportion is higher. In other words, the ART lottery can be won. If the ART lottery is won, the precursor period lottery for determining the length of the period until the ART control starts (precursor period) is performed, and the count of the precursor period determined in the precursor period lottery is started. At the same time, an ART start effect lottery for determining the type of ART start effect to be executed when starting the control of the ART is performed, and the ART start effect flag determined in the ART start effect lottery can be specified. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Thereafter, when the warning period determined in the warning period lottery has elapsed, the control of the ART start effect is started, and a reel effect flag corresponding to the type of reel effect specified based on the ART start effect flag is stored in the RAM 41c. And the reel effect determined in the ART start effect lottery is executed in the reel control process described later based on the reel effect flag.

  In the ART start production lottery, depending on the type of ART won in the ART lottery, one of the above-mentioned first reel productions of red 7 uniform production and blue 7 uniform production is won. ART lottery The higher the degree of advantage for the player with respect to the ART that has been won, the higher the ratio at which the production of blue 7 matches can be selected. This suggests that, when an ART start effect is executed as an ART start effect, it is more likely to be controlled to an ART that has a higher advantage for the player than when a red 7 effect is executed. On the other hand, even when a red 7 uniform effect is executed, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to ART with a high advantage for the player, so it is expected to be controlled by ART in the ART start effect A feeling can be heightened.

  When a predetermined lottery role (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is won in the internal lottery, the above-mentioned ART start effect lottery is performed with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the reel effect flag based is set, and if the reel effect flag is not set, it is determined whether or not to execute the ART possibility suggesting effect indicating the possibility of winning the ART lottery A lottery that suggests ART possibility. In the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery, any of the above-mentioned second reel production of the fine vibration effect, the reverse rotation effect, and the low speed rotation effect can be selected at a rate according to the result of the ART lottery, When the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won, a reel effect flag capable of specifying the type of reel effect won in the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, in the subsequent reel control process, the reel effect determined in the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is executed as the ART possibility suggestion effect.

  On the other hand, if a predetermined lottery role (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery and the reel effect flag is set, an ART possibility suggesting effect Without starting the lottery, maintaining the state where the reel effect flag based on the ART start effect lottery is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, restricting the execution of the ART possibility suggesting effect, the ART start effect lottery The reel production determined by is preferentially executed.

  In this embodiment, in a game in which a predetermined lottery object combination (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is won in the internal lottery, and the reel effect flag is not set, While the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is performed and the reel effect flag is set, the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is not performed. However, in the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery target role (in this embodiment, , Strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) may be configured to execute the ART possibility suggesting effect uniformly regardless of whether the reel effect flag is set or not. In the configuration, if the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won and the reel effect flag is not yet set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the AR While the reel effect flag is set based on the lottery result in the possibility suggestion effect lottery, and the reel effect flag is already set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c even though the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won, The game that won the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is maintained by maintaining the reel effect flag that has already been set without setting the reel effect flag in conjunction with winning the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery. When the reel effect determined by the above-mentioned ART start effect lottery is executed, the reel effect execution associated with winning the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is limited and determined by the ART start effect lottery. It is possible to prioritize the reel production performed.

  Further, in the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery, when the ART lottery performed in conjunction with the winning of the predetermined lottery object that triggered the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery, Alternatively, the ratio at which the low-speed rotation effect can be selected is set higher than the case where the ART lottery is not won, and when the ART lottery is won, the ratio at which the reverse rotation effect can be selected is It is set higher than the ratio at which the low-speed rotation effect can be selected. As a result, a reel effect (a fine vibration effect, a reverse rotation effect, a low-speed rotation effect) is performed as an ART possibility suggesting effect, and it is suggested that the possibility of being controlled by ART is high and the reel to be executed. It is possible to suggest the high possibility of being controlled by ART depending on the type of effect (in this example, there is a possibility of being controlled by ART in the order of a fine vibration effect, a low-speed rotation effect, and a reverse rotation effect). Higher), it is possible to increase the expectation of being controlled by ART in the ART possibility suggesting effect.

  In the present embodiment, the first reel effect is an effect in which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are vibrated for a predetermined period and then the predetermined symbol combination is aligned with the winning line LN, but at least the reels 2L, 2C, and An effect that stops the reel 2R at a specific position, that is, an effect that temporarily stops the reel at a specific position, such as an effect that only stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a specific position, or the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R Special fluctuation modes that are not performed in a normal game over a predetermined period (for example, predetermined pattern alignment, reel slight vibration, reel reverse rotation, reel low-speed rotation, reel partial rotation, control without changing the reel over a predetermined period After the control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a specific position, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R After stopping at a fixed position, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are specified after changing the reels in some or all of the changing modes of the reels that make up the special reel and the second reel effect. For example, an effect that stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a plurality of specific positions may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the second reel effect is an effect of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed rotation after being rotated at a slight vibration, reverse rotation, or low speed for a predetermined period. An effect that does not stop the reel at a specific position, that is, an effect that causes the reel to fluctuate in a predetermined fluctuation mode without setting a stop control table, and a special fluctuation mode that is not performed in a normal game ( For example, a mode of starting fluctuation after controlling the reel without changing it for a predetermined period, a fluctuation mode in a direction different from the normal, a fluctuation mode in a speed different from the normal speed, etc.) The effect may be varied by a combination of modes such as rotation, low-speed rotation of the reel, and partial rotation of the reel.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is a period until the stop operation of the rotating reel is validated when a predetermined lottery role (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry) is won in the internal lottery. Can be delayed for a predetermined time, and a stop freeze can be performed that suggests that there is a high possibility that a predetermined role (strong cherry in this embodiment) has been won, and the first stop operation is performed as a stop freeze. The first stop freeze that is executed when the second stop operation is performed and the second stop operation is delayed, and the second stop operation is executed and the next stop operation is executed. The operation includes a second stop freeze that delays a period until the third stop operation is validated, and a third stop freeze that executes both the first stop freeze and the second stop freeze.

  The main control unit 41 refers to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and reels based on the above-mentioned ART start effect lottery when a predetermined lottery role (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry) is won in the internal lottery. It is determined whether or not the production flag is set, and if the reel production flag is not set, a freeze lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform stop freeze and the type of stop freeze when performing stop freeze. When any stop freeze is won in the freeze lottery, a stop freeze flag that can specify the type of stop freeze won in the freeze lottery is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the subsequent reel control processing, stop freeze is executed at a predetermined timing based on the stop freeze flag.

  On the other hand, if the reel drawing flag is set when a predetermined lottery target (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry) is won in the internal lottery, the freeze freeze lottery is not performed and the stop freeze flag is set. By not setting the predetermined area in the RAM 41c, the execution of the stop freeze is restricted, and the reel effect determined by the ART start effect lottery is preferentially executed.

  In this embodiment, in a game where a predetermined lottery role (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry) is won in the internal lottery, if the reel effect flag is not set, the freeze lottery is performed. In the case where the reel effect flag is set, the freeze lottery is not performed, but in the game in which a predetermined lottery subject (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry) is won in the internal lottery, Regardless of whether or not the reel effect flag is set, the freeze effect may be executed uniformly. In such a configuration, the freeze effect is won and the reel effect flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If not, the stop freeze flag is set based on the lottery result in the freeze lottery while the freeze lottery is won. However, if the reel effect flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the game won in the freeze lottery is determined by the above-mentioned ART start effect lottery by not setting the stop freeze flag. In the case of a game in which a reel effect is executed, the execution of the stop freeze associated with winning the freeze lottery is restricted, and only the reel effect determined by the ART start effect lottery can be executed.

  Also, in the freeze lottery, the first stop freeze is performed at a predetermined ratio according to the type of winning combination (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry) in the internal lottery that triggered the freeze lottery. The second stop freeze or the third stop freeze can be selected, and when the strong cherry is elected as a predetermined role, the first stop freeze, the second stop freeze or the second stop freeze Three stop freezes are selected, the third stop freeze can be selected at a higher rate than the second stop freeze, and the second stop freeze can be selected at a higher rate than the first stop freeze. In addition, when the weak cherry is won, the first stop freeze, the second stop freeze, or the loss can be selected, and the first stop freeze is selected at a higher rate than the second stop freeze. To be able to be. As a result of the stop freeze being performed, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the predetermined combination (in this embodiment, strong cherry) has been won, and the predetermined combination according to the type of the stop freeze to be executed. (In this example, there is a higher possibility that a strong cherry was won in the order of the first stop freeze, the second stop freeze, and the third stop freeze) Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the ART lottery will be performed under more advantageous conditions.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the strong cherry is won in the internal lottery, the combination of the symbols of the corner cherry 1 can be stopped at the winning line LN, while when the weak cherry is won, the corner cherry 2 Can be stopped on the winning line LN. However, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the left reel is the first stop, any combination of the symbols of the corner cherry 1 and the corner cherry 2 is the winning line LN. When the player stops, “Cherry” stops at the lower part of the left reel 2L. Based on the stop mode, the player identifies whether the strong cherry or the weak cherry is won in the internal lottery. You can't do that. On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment wins the freeze lottery, the stop operation is performed at a different rate depending on whether the strong cherry is won or the weak cherry is won. Since the stop freeze is executed, the expectation to the possibility that the strong cherry is won can be enhanced by the manner in which the stop freeze is executed.

  Next, a main process executed by the main control unit 41 after the initial setting process or the setting change process will be described. The main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. One period of the main process corresponds to one unit of the game. In this embodiment, the main process is included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the main process, a game start waiting process (Sa1) that waits until a game is started, an internal lottery process (Sa2) that performs an internal lottery when the game is started, reels 2L, Reel control process (Sa3) for performing control to rotate and stop 2C, 2R, game end setting process (Sa4) for performing various settings when the game is ended by stopping all reels 2L, 2C, 2R Are sequentially repeated.

  In the game start waiting process, the main control unit 41 first disables interrupts, sets the final address of the initialization target RAM (the final address of the game stack area (unused)), and uses the specified address. The area of the RAM 41c shown is cleared. At this time, if the main process is started after the setting change process, the special work in the usable area is stored as the start address of the initialization target RAM when the setting change process is ended. The address next to the last address of the area is set, and in the game start waiting process, the final address of the game stack area (unused) is set as the final address of the RAM to be initialized, and the special address in the game RAM area is set. Areas other than the work and game stack area (in use) (important work, general work, unused area 3, and stack area (unused)) are initialized. At the end of a game that is not in a specific gaming state, the start address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of the game (start address of the unused area 3) is set in the game end setting process (Sa4), and the game starts. In the waiting process (Sa1), since the final address of the RAM to be initialized (final address of the game stack area (unused)) is set, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) among the available areas. Will be initialized. Further, at the end of the specific game state and at the end of the game, the start address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of the specific game state in the game end setting process (Sa4) (special of the game RAM area) In the game start waiting process, the final address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of a specific gaming state (game stack area (unused)) is set. In the game RAM area, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) are initialized.

  Then, after clearing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the interruption is permitted, the system waits in a state where the bet number can be set, and a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set and the start switch 7 is operated. Execute the process to start the game.

  Next, in the internal lottery process (Sa2), whether or not winning is awarded to each of the above-mentioned winning combinations based on the internal lottery random value latched simultaneously with the start of the game by detecting the operation of the start switch 7 (that is, the display result) The process (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to permit the derivation of () is performed.

  Next, in the reel control process (Sa3), the reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R based on the operation of the start switch 7, the result of the internal lottery in the step of Sa2, and the player A reel rotation stop process for stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is executed in response to the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R being detected.

  Next, in the game end setting process (Sa4), when it is determined in the step Sa3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has stopped, the display results derived for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are used. A process for determining whether or not a winning has occurred is executed. When it is determined that a winning has occurred, processing such as credit addition and medal payout is performed based on the number of payouts according to the winning. When a winning occurs, a process for setting a gaming state for the next game is executed after the medal payout is completed. Further, when no winning occurs, after the reels are stopped, processing for setting a gaming state for the next game is executed.

  In the process of setting the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the specific gaming state is ended. If the specific gaming state is not ended, the start address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the game is set. In the case of the end of the specific gaming state, the initial address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the specific gaming state is set. And it returns to the step of Sa1 and each process of Sa1-Sa4 is repeatedly performed sequentially.

  Also, in the main process, a command storing process for generating a command according to the progress of the game and setting the command in the command queue is executed, and the set command is executed in the normal timer execution process (main) thereafter. It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by command transmission processing.

  Next, the reel control process executed by the main control unit 41 in the main process will be described with reference to FIGS. The reel control process is a process for rotating and stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In response to the reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. And a reel rotation stop process for stopping the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and is executed after the internal lottery process in the main process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the control content of the reel control process executed by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the control content of the reel rotation start process executed by the main control unit 41 in the reel control process. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop control table setting process executed by the main control unit 41 in the reel control process.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the reel control process, first, a reel rotation start process is executed (Sb1) to start the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the reel rotation start process, it is determined whether or not the above-described reel effect flag is set with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc1). In the step of Sc1, if it is determined that the reel effect flag is not set, the wait time (from the reel rotation start time in the previous game is referred to with reference to the wait time counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not about 4.1 seconds have elapsed (Sc2). If it is determined that the predetermined wait time has not elapsed, the system waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time elapses, the wait time counter is initialized (Sc3), and a new Start timing the wait time. The wait time counter is updated each time a timer interrupt process (main) is performed, so that the elapsed time from the start of reel rotation in the previous game is counted.

  After the wait time counter is initialized in step Sc3, the reel motor excitation pattern for starting all the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and accelerating them to a predetermined constant speed rotation is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sc4). By setting an excitation pattern for accelerating to a predetermined constant speed rotation, the excitation state of each excitation phase of each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R is sequentially updated in the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main), and all The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are accelerated to a predetermined constant speed.

  Then, after setting a predetermined excitation pattern in the step of Sc4 and starting acceleration of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, a stop control table setting process described later is executed for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. (Sc5), a stop control table is set that can specify the number of sliding symbols for each timing when the stop operation is performed for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. Thus, the stop control table for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is set during the acceleration control of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R by the timer interrupt process (main).

  After performing the stop control table setting process in the step of Sc5, a rotation start flag that can specify that the rotation of the reel has started based on the operation of the start switch 7 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sc6), the process returns to the reel control process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sc1 that the reel effect flag is set, it is determined based on the reel effect flag whether or not the type of the reel effect is the first reel effect (Sc7). If it is a one-reel effect, control of the first reel effect is executed (Sc8). In the first reel effect, after starting the control to slightly vibrate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R over a predetermined period, a stop control table setting process described later is executed to specify the reel effect specified based on the reel effect flag. The stop control table is set so that the combination of symbols according to the type is stopped on the winning line LN, and after a predetermined period has passed since the minute vibration control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, it is set. The reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped according to the stop control table. Then, the first reel effect is ended when a predetermined time elapses with the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stopped.

  After the first reel effect is completed, the wait time counter is initialized (Sc9), and control for starting each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and accelerating to a constant speed is started in the same manner as in the step Sc3. The time to be determined is determined at random, and the determination result is set as a random acceleration start time in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc10). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the random acceleration start timing has been reached for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (Sc11).

  If it is determined in step Sc11 that any of the reels has reached the random acceleration start time, an excitation pattern of the reel motor for starting the corresponding reel and accelerating it to a predetermined constant speed rotation is stored in the RAM 41c. Acceleration is started by setting the predetermined area (Sc14). Then, it is determined whether or not all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R have been set to start acceleration (Sc15). If there is a reel which has not been set to start acceleration, the process returns to the step of Sc11. It is determined whether a random acceleration start time has been reached for a reel that has not been set to start acceleration.

  In the step of Sc11, when it is determined that the random acceleration start time has not been reached for any reel, it is determined whether or not the stop control table has been set for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R (Sc12). If the stop control table has not been set, a stop control table setting process to be described later is executed for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R as in the step of Sc5 (Sc13), and each reel 2L, 2C, A stop control table is set for 2R. Thereafter, the process returns to the step of Sc11, and thereafter, it is determined whether or not the random acceleration start timing has been reached for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R (Sc11).

  By the steps Sc11 to Sc15, the stop control table is set for all the reels during the acceleration control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Further, by sequentially starting the acceleration of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R based on the random acceleration start time, the start timing of rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is randomly delayed, and the subsequent reels 2L, 2C The positional relationship between 2Rs can be random, and the positional relationship between the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be prevented from becoming an indication of the timing of the stop operation in the game.

  If it is determined in step Sc15 that the settings for starting acceleration have been completed for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the process proceeds to step Sc6, and the rotation start flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc6). Return to the reel control process.

  Further, in the step of Sc1, when it is determined that the reel effect flag is set, and in the step of Sc7, when it is determined that the reel effect type is not the first reel effect, that is, the reel effect type is the first. In the case of the 2-reel effect, similar to the step of Sc4, after executing a stop control table setting process to be described later for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R (Sc16), the control of the second reel effect is executed (S16). Sc17). In the second reel effect, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are changed in the above-described special change mode specified based on the reel effect flag. Then, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are varied in a special variation manner or are stopped, the second reel effect is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the second reel effect is finished, the wait time counter is initialized (Sc18) in the same manner as the step of Sc3, and each reel 2L accompanying the end of the second reel effect, depending on the mode of the second reel effect, The reel motor excitation pattern for accelerating from 2C, 2R to a predetermined constant speed rotation is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the acceleration to the constant speed rotation is started (Sc19), and the process proceeds to step Sc6. Then, the rotation start flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the process returns to the reel control process.

  After the reel rotation start process is completed and the process returns to the reel control process, the stop freeze flag indicates whether or not to perform a stop freeze that delays the period until the stop operation of the rotating reel is validated for a predetermined time. (Sb2). When it is determined that the stop freeze is performed, the timing specified based on the stop freeze flag, that is, if the stop freeze is the first stop freeze, it is after the first stop operation and the second stop freeze. If it is after the second stop operation is performed, and if it is the third stop freeze, the delay processing is performed after the first stop operation and after the second stop operation is performed. Execute (Sb3).

  In the delay process, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set, and an elapsed time from when a valid stop operation is detected is determined to be a predetermined delay based on the value of an effective timer that starts timing in a step Sb28 described later. It is determined whether or not the time has reached, and if the value of the valid timer has not reached the predetermined delay time, the process waits until the value of the valid timer reaches the predetermined delay time. Then, when the value of the valid timer reaches a predetermined delay time, the delay process is terminated and the process returns to the reel control process. When it is determined that a predetermined delay time has elapsed based on the value of the valid timer that starts timing when a valid stop operation is detected, the delay process is terminated, thereby enabling effective stop. Even if the period during which the reel rotation stop process after the operation is detected varies depending on the number of sliding symbols (0 to 4) when the reel is stopped, Since the execution period of the delay process varies, the process after the delay process can be executed at a uniform timing after the effective stop operation is detected. Thereby, on the sub-control unit 91 side, when performing a predetermined effect during the stop freeze, it is possible to perform an effect in accordance with the end timing of the stop freeze executed on the main control unit 41 side.

  The delay process of this embodiment is configured to determine whether or not a predetermined delay time has elapsed based on an activation timer whose timing is started in step Sb28. Any configuration that can determine whether or not a predetermined delay time has been reached based on the elapsed time from the time of detection is possible, from the time when a valid stop operation is detected by a timing means other than the activation timer. It is also possible to have a configuration for measuring the time.

  After executing the delay process in the step of Sb3 or determining that the stop freeze is not performed in the step of Sb2, the timer interruption waiting process is executed (Sb4). In the timer interruption waiting process, the timer interruption is set to be permitted, and the process waits until the timer interruption process (main) is performed once.

  After the timer interruption waiting process in step Sb4 is completed, the input / output error check process is executed (Sb5). In the insertion / dispensing error check process, an abnormality of the medal selector (hereinafter referred to as medal insertion error) based on the output of the insertion medal sensor 31 and the abnormality of the hopper unit 34 (hereinafter referred to as medal payout) based on the output of the payout sensor 34c and the like. Error). When at least one of an insertion error and a payout error is detected in the input / output error check process (Sb6), an input / payout error flag that can identify the existing medal insertion error and medal payout error is set ( Sb7).

  After setting the insertion / withdrawal error flag in step Sb7 or after determining that neither the medal insertion error nor the medal payout error has occurred in step Sb6, the door opening check process is executed (Sb8), It is determined whether or not the output state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed. If it is determined that the output state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed (Sb9), a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is set in the command queue of the RAM 41c (Sb10). The door command set in step Sb10 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the normal command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process (main).

  After setting a door command in the step Sb10 or after determining that the output state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed in the step Sb9, a rotation error check process is executed (Sb11). In the rotation error check process, the number of steps after the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected without detecting the reel reference position among the reels under rotation control for which the stop operation has not been completed is the predetermined number of steps (this number In the embodiment, it is 400 steps, and is set to a value larger than 336 steps required for one revolution of the reel.) When there is a reel exceeding the reel, abnormal reel rotation (hereinafter referred to as a rotation error). When an abnormality is detected, a rotation error flag that can identify the reel in which the rotation error has occurred is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  Then, after the rotation error check process in step Sb11 is completed, it is determined whether or not a rotation error has occurred based on the rotation error flag (Sb12), and a rotation error has occurred in one of the reels under rotation control. If it is determined that the operation is stopped, the reel stop operation during rotation control is set to invalid (Sb13), and 1 is added to the error counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb14). Is less than a predetermined value (3 in the present embodiment) (Sb15). When it is determined that the value of the error counter is not less than the predetermined value, that is, when the reel is not normally rotated and a rotation error is continuously detected a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment). Then, error processing is executed (Sb16). In the error processing, the rotation error flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is updated and the rotation error flag is set so that the rotation of all the reels under rotation control is stopped and the reel that has stopped the rotation can be identified. Is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, an error command that can specify that a rotation error has occurred is set in the command queue, and the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. After that, the control waits in an error state that disables the game so as not to proceed. Thereafter, the error state is canceled by a reset operation, thereby terminating the error processing, initializing the error counter, and setting it to 0 (Sb17).

  After determining that the value of the error counter is less than the predetermined value in step Sb15, or after initializing the error counter in step Sb17, the reel having the rotation error is specified based on the rotation error flag. At the same time, the rotation error flag is canceled, the specified excitation pattern of the reel is once cleared, the reel starting pattern is newly set, and the reel motor is excited, so that the rotation control is performed again from the beginning and the constant speed is reached. The acceleration process for accelerating again to the rotation is executed again (Sb18). Thereafter, a reel reacceleration command capable of specifying that the corresponding reel has been accelerated again is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb19), and the process returns to the step Sb4. Thereafter, when the restarted reel is normally rotated, no rotation error is detected in the rotation error check process, and it is determined in step Sb12 that no rotation error has occurred. .

  If it is determined in step Sb12 that no rotation error has occurred, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited (Sb20), and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, so that the previous timer interrupt process (main) Based on the rotation state information updated by the above, it is determined whether or not all reels under rotation control for which stop operation has not been completed are rotated at a constant speed (Sb21), and all reels are rotated at a constant speed. If it is determined that it is not rotated, the process returns to step Sb4. The rotation state information is updated in the timer interrupt process (main), and is information that can specify the state of the rotation speed of each reel motor during rotation control at the time when the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. It is. By the timer interruption process (main) executed in the step of Sb4, the rotation state information is updated to a value that can specify that each reel motor under rotation control is in a constant speed rotation state. In the step, it is determined that all reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb21 that all the reels under rotation control that have not been stopped are rotated at a constant speed, whether or not the rotation start flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not it is the first time that it has been determined that all reels have been rotated at a constant speed (Sb22), the rotation start flag is set, and all reels have a constant speed. When it is determined that the rotation is determined to be the first time, an acceleration completion command that can specify that the control for accelerating to constant speed rotation for all reels is completed is set in the command queue of the RAM 41c. (Sb23), the rotation start flag is erased from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb24).

  If it is determined in step Sb22 that it has not been the first time that all reels have been rotated at a constant speed, that is, the rotation-controlled reel has once reached constant speed rotation, but a rotation error has occurred in step Sb12. Is detected and is accelerated again to the constant speed rotation in the step of Sb17, so that the constant speed rotation is reached again, or the rotation start flag is deleted in the step of Sb24, the RAM 41c is set. When it is determined that the predetermined time has passed based on the valid timer (Sb25), the acceptance of the stop operation is set to be valid for the reel for which the rotation is controlled (Sb26). In addition, when the acceptance of the stop operation is already set to be valid for the reel that is performing the rotation control, the valid state is maintained.

  Then, after the acceptance of the stop operation is set to be effective in the step of Sb26, whether or not a valid stop operation is detected for the reel under rotation control, that is, the output of the stop switch of the reel under rotation control is from the off state. It is determined whether or not the state has changed to the on state (Sb27). If it is determined that a valid stop operation has not been detected, the process returns to the step Sb4, and the steps Sb4 to Sb27 are repeatedly executed. Wait until a stop operation is detected.

  Thereafter, when a valid stop operation is detected in the step Sb27, the timer interrupt is permitted after the stop operation related process 1 is executed in the state in which the timer interrupt is prohibited in the step Sb20 (Sb28). (Sb29), and the stop operation related process 2 is executed (Sb30). In the stop operation related process 1, detection is made in step Sb27 based on the operation status of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R updated by the previous timer interrupt process (main), the reel rotation state based on the rotation state information, and the like. The reel under rotation control corresponding to the effective stop operation performed is identified, and the number of steps (stop) from the reel reference position at that time for the reel motor of the reel corresponding to the stop operation detected in step Sb27. The number of steps to be the operation position) is specified, and a valid timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized, and the elapsed time from when a valid stop operation is detected in the step Sb26 is started. Etc. Further, in the stop operation related process 2, a process of setting the reception of the reel stop operation corresponding to the valid stop operation detected in step Sb27 to be invalid is performed. The stop operation related process 1 is a process for performing various controls based on the information updated by the previous timer interrupt process (main), while the stop operation related process 2 is a timer interrupt process (main). This is a process of performing various controls without being based on information updated by.

  Then, after the stop operation related process 2 is completed in the step of Sb30, the timer interrupt is set again to be prohibited (Sb31), and the reel rotation stop process is executed (Sb32). In the reel rotation stop process, a stop control table corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation specified in the step Sb30 is performed is selected, and the stop operation position specified in the step Sb30 is referred to with reference to the stop control table. The number of steps at the stop position corresponding to the number of steps is specified, the number of sliding frames is calculated based on the number of steps at the stopping position and the current number of steps of the reel motor, and the number of sliding frames is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. To do. The number of sliding symbols set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is then referred to in the processing related to the rotation control of the reel motor in the timer interrupt processing, and the number of sliding symbols, that is, the number of steps corresponding to the stop position specified by the stop control table. All the phases are excited and the reel is stopped.

  Then, after executing the reel rotation stop process, a stop control table setting process described later is executed (Sb33), and a stop control table is set for the remaining reels under rotation control. After executing the stop control table setting process, it is determined whether or not the reel in which the stop operation is detected in step Sb27 is stopped (Sb34), and if it is determined that the reel is not stopped, It waits until the reel stops, and when it is determined that the reel is stopped, it is determined whether or not an effective stop operation has been performed for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (Sb35). If all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not stopped, the process returns to the step Sb2, and the control of the steps Sb2 to Sb27 is executed for the remaining reels that are not stopped.

  Then, if an effective stop operation is performed for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and it is determined in step Sb35 that all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, after executing the timer interruption waiting process (Sb36), the input / output error check process is executed (Sb37). In the insertion / payout error check process, a medal insertion error and a medal payout error are detected as in step Sb5. If at least one of a medal insertion error and a medal payout error is detected in the insertion / payout error check process in step Sb37, or if the insertion / payout error flag is set in step Sb7, the input / output error is detected. Is determined (Sb38), and error processing is executed (Sb39). In the error processing, an error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred, that is, a medal insertion error or a medal payout error, is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and an error command that can identify the type of the error is displayed in the command queue. After the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the control unit waits in an error state that disables the game so as not to proceed. Thereafter, the error process is terminated by releasing the error state by a reset operation.

  In this embodiment, when the input / output error flag is set in step Sb7 and it is determined that an input / output error has occurred in step Sb38, error processing is executed in step Sb39, that is, reel 2L. When a loading / unloading error is detected during rotation control of 2C, 2R, error processing based on the detection of the loading / unloading error is performed after all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped. Although the configuration is such, the main control unit 41 may be configured to execute an error process when the input / output error is detected by the input / output error check process. Further, for errors other than insertion / withdrawal errors, an error process may be performed when an error is detected, or an error process may be performed after the reel rotation control is completed.

  After determining that there is no insertion / withdrawal error in step Sb38, or after the error processing in step Sb39 is completed, whether or not the third stop switch is in operation, that is, the third stop switch It is determined whether or not the stop switch is turned off and the stop switch is in the off state (Sb40). If the stop switch is being operated, the process waits until the operation is finished. Then, after determining that the stop switch is not being operated, a stop command for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is completed, and a game end command that can specify that the game ends is set in the command queue (Sb41). . Note that the game end command set in step Sb41 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the normal command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process (main).

  After setting the game end command in the step of Sb41, it is determined whether or not the special combination has won in the game executing the reel control process (Sb42). An operation end delay process is executed (Sb43), and the process waits until a predetermined time elapses after the operation end delay process is started. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the delay process at the end of the operation ends, and the process returns to the reel control process. By executing the operation end delay processing, the processing after the operation end delay processing is delayed for a predetermined time.

  Then, after the operation end delay process in step Sb43 ends, or after it is determined in step Sb42 that the special combination has not won, the reel control process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, the stop control table setting process executed by the main control unit 41 in the reel control process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the stop control table setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unstopped reel, that is, whether or not there is a reel for which the effective stop operation is not performed and the rotation control is continued. Is determined (Sd1). If there is an unstopped reel, the timer interrupt wait process is executed (Sd2), the timer interrupt is set to “permitted”, and after waiting until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once. Then, after setting the timer interrupt to be prohibited (Sd3), the stop control table setting process is performed for one reel for which the rotation control is continued (Sd4), and the number of sliding frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed is calculated. Set an identifiable stop control table.

  Then, after the stop control table setting process is completed for one reel, it is determined whether or not the stop control table setting process has been performed for all unstopped reels (Sd5), and the stop control table setting process is performed. If there are no unstopped reels, the process returns to the step of Sd2, and after executing the timer interruption waiting process, through the step of Sd3, the stop control table is set for the remaining reel in the step of Sd4. Perform processing to set the stop control table.

  When it is determined in step Sd5 that the stop control table has been set for all unstopped reels, or when it is determined in step Sd1 that there are no unstopped reels, stop control table setting processing is performed. End and return to reel control processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the reel control process after starting the game to start the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and then stops the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. The control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel at a predetermined stop position is stopped by detecting the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. And at least one reel is controlled to rotate, and it is determined whether or not a specific event that may have caused an abnormality has occurred.

  In such a configuration, after a stop operation is performed during the rotation of the reel, it is determined whether or not an event related to an abnormality has occurred in a period during which stop control is performed to stop the rotation of the reel. Excessive processing is performed during the stop control period, and the target reel for stop control may stop at an unintended stop position.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs the reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the reel control process, and then the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. The system waits until an operation is detected, detects a stop operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and performs a reel rotation stop process for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel. In a period of waiting until a valid operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the process, an abnormality determination process is performed to determine whether or not a specific event that may have caused an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in the state that occupies most of the rotation of the reel, the specific event can be determined, while the reel is detected after the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. During the period until the rotation of the reel is stopped by the rolling stop process, the abnormality determination process is not executed, so that the load during the process related to the stop of the reel is reduced. Therefore, an extra process is performed during the reel stop control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from stopping at a position where the target reel of stop control is not intended.

  In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is one of the abnormality determination processes during a period of waiting until an effective operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation start process. By executing the insertion / dispensing error check process as described above, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that an abnormality related to the insertion of the medal from the medal insertion unit 4 has occurred based on the output of the insertion medal sensor 31. In the state that occupies the majority, the abnormality relating to the insertion of medals can be determined as a specific event, but the reel rotation is stopped by the reel rotation stop process after the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. During this period, the input / output error check process is not executed, so the processing load related to reel stop is reduced. By extra processing during the stop control of Le is performed can be prevented that the subject reel stop control will be stopped reel unintended position.

  In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is one of the abnormality determination processes during a period of waiting until an effective operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation start process. By executing the insertion / withdrawal error check process, it is determined whether there is a possibility that an abnormality related to the medal payout by the hopper unit 34 has occurred based on the output of the payout sensor 34c. , The abnormality relating to the medal payout can be determined as a specific event, and after the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, the reel rotation is stopped by the reel rotation stop processing. During the period, since the input / output error check process is not executed, the load during the process related to reel stop is reduced. By extra processing during the stop control of Lumpur it is made possible to prevent the target reel stop control will be stopped reel unintended position.

  In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is one of the abnormality determination processes during a period of waiting until an effective operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation start process. As the rotation error check process is executed, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that an abnormality related to the rotation of the reel has occurred based on the output of the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R. In the occupied state, an abnormality relating to the rotation of the reel can be determined as a specific event, and the period from when the operation of the effective stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is detected until the reel rotation is stopped by the reel rotation stop processing Then, since the rotation error check process is not executed, the load during the process related to the reel stop is reduced. Reel can be prevented from being stopped by the reel targeted unintended position stop control by unnecessary process is performed.

  In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is one of the abnormality determination processes during a period of waiting until an effective operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation start process. The door opening check process is executed to determine whether or not the output state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed. Therefore, in the state that occupies most of the rotation of the reel, the door opening detection switch 25 is used as a specific event. In the period from when the operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected until the reel rotation is stopped by the reel rotation stop process, Since the door opening check process is not executed, the processing load related to reel stop is reduced, so extra processing is performed during reel stop control. Target reel stop control by Rukoto it is possible to prevent the stopped reel unintended position.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the reel control process in the main process, and periodically interrupts the main process while executing the timer interrupt process (main). After the reel rotation start processing for starting the rotation of 2L, 2C, and 2R, the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed during a period of waiting until a valid operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Each time it is executed, an abnormality determination process is executed to determine whether or not a specific event has occurred. Therefore, an abnormality determination is made during a period of waiting until a valid stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R operation is detected. Since it is not necessary to always execute processing, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment detects the stop operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R after performing the reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In this configuration, the reel rotation stop process for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed and the control for stopping the reels is repeated until the rotation of all the reels is stopped. When there is a reel that is still rotating after the stop, the abnormality determination process is executed in the period until the stop operation of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. It is possible to determine a specific event while reducing the load.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an input / output error check process, a rotation error process, and a door opening check process as an abnormality determination process, and after the reel rotation stop process is performed and the reel is stopped. When there is a reel that is still rotating, the abnormality determination process is executed until a valid stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, so the load during the reel stop control is reduced. On the other hand, as specific events, it is possible to determine whether an abnormality related to the insertion of medals, an abnormality related to the payout of medals, an abnormality related to the rotation of the reel, or a change in the output state of the door opening detection switch 25 has occurred.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment, when a valid stop operation is detected in the reel control process, after the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped, the reel that is still performing the rotation control remains. Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the abnormality determination process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the stop operation has been performed until a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous stop operation was detected. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the acceptance of the next stop operation is set to be valid, and the abnormality determination process and the stop operation are performed each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The system is configured to repeatedly perform the control to stop the corresponding reel until the rotation of all the reels is stopped by waiting while performing the determination of whether or not, and detecting the effective stop operation. Operation detected The abnormality determination process is executed even during a period from when the reception of the next stop operation is validated to a later period, in which it is not determined whether or not the stop operation has been performed. Can determine events.

  In particular, in the reel control process, when the acceptance of the next stop operation is validated, after the valid stop operation is detected based on the validation timer, the acceptance of the next stop operation is validated. It is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed, and when the predetermined period has elapsed, the acceptance of the next stop operation is validated, so that a valid stop operation is detected and the reel stops. Although the time until it is changed depends on the number of sliding symbols at the time of stop (0 to 4 in this embodiment), the next stop is performed after a valid stop operation is detected regardless of the number of sliding symbols. The period until the acceptance of the operation is validated can be made constant. The main control unit 41 determines an abnormality every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed even during a period from when the effective stop operation is detected until the next stop operation is accepted. Since the process is executed, it is possible to determine the specific event even during the period.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute the input / output error check process, the rotation error process, and the door opening check process as the abnormality determination process, and does not determine whether or not a stop operation has been performed. Even during the period, the abnormality determination process is executed, so whether a change has occurred in the abnormality relating to the insertion of medals, the abnormality relating to the payout of medals, the abnormality relating to the rotation of the reel, or the output state of the door opening detection switch 25 as the specific event even during the period. You can determine whether or not.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the reel control process in the main process, and periodically interrupts the main process while executing the timer interrupt process (main). Stops each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed during a period of waiting until a valid stop operation is detected after performing reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of 2L, 2C, and 2R Since it is determined whether or not an operation has been detected, it is not necessary to always determine whether or not a stop operation has been detected in a period of waiting until a valid stop operation is detected, thereby reducing the processing load. .

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to execute the timer control process (main) by periodically interrupting the main process while executing the reel control process in the main process. , After starting rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, in a state where the timer interrupt is disabled and the timer interrupt is disabled, based on predetermined information updated by the timer interrupt processing (main) If all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, and if it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed, a process to validate the stop operation is executed. And determining whether or not an effective stop operation has been detected, and when an effective stop operation is detected, identifying which reel the stop operation corresponds to, and identifying the specified reel Corresponding to For the motor, a stop operation for performing a process of specifying the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) based on predetermined information updated by the timer interrupt process (main) Since the related process 1 is executed, these processes are executed in a series of prohibited states in which the timer interrupt is prohibited and the predetermined information is not updated by the timer interrupt process (main). The timer interrupt process (main) serving as a reference can be matched in each process executed in a series of prohibited states.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets the timer interruption to be prohibited when a valid stop operation is detected after starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the reel control process. The number of steps of the reel motor currently updated by the timer interrupt process (main) and the number of steps of the reel stop operation position specified when the stop operation is performed with the timer interrupt disabled Based on the above, the number of sliding frames is identified from the stop control table, and the reel rotation stop process is executed to stop the corresponding reel based on the number of sliding frames, and then the reels that are under rotation control remain. In addition, since the stop control table setting process for setting the stop control table for those reels is executed, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed during the execution of these processes, It is possible to prevent the control of these processes is interrupted unintentionally, never these processes is complicated.

  In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 determines that all reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, the stop operation related process 1 is terminated after an effective stop operation is detected. The period until the main control unit 41 executes the reel rotation stop process, and the period during which the process for setting one stop control table is executed is less than the time interval at which the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. Even if the timer interrupt process (main) is set to the prohibited state during this period, the control performed by the timer interrupt process (main), for example, the excitation control of the reel motor is affected. There is no such thing.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets the timer interrupt process (main) to be prohibited, and then determines whether or not all the reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed. Is activated at a constant speed, the stop operation is validated, and after a valid stop operation is detected, the stop operation related process 1 is executed, and after the stop operation related process 1 ends, the timer interrupt process From the process of canceling the prohibition of (main), that is, from the process of determining the constant rotation of the reel to the process of enabling the stop operation and the process of detecting the effective stop operation, until the stop operation related process 1 is executed The control is executed in a series of timer interruption prohibited states. For example, when a valid stop operation is detected, the timer interruption prohibited state is once released, and then the stop operation related processing 1 is performed. When running Fine timer interruption by to set the prohibition may be configured to divide the prohibited state of the set of timer interrupts in a plurality. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to execute the timer interrupt process (main) between these processes, so that the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is not restricted more than necessary. .

  In this way, in the configuration in which the series of timer interrupt prohibition states are divided into a plurality, for example, the prohibition state is divided into a first prohibition state and a second prohibition state, and the reel is rotating at a constant speed. Whether the stop operation is enabled based on the fact that the reel is rotating at a constant speed in the first prohibition state, and a valid stop operation is detected. In the first prohibited state, the timer interrupt that is performed immediately before the first prohibited state is performed by executing the process for determining whether or not and the stop operation related process 1 in the second prohibited state. While it is determined that the reel is in the rotating state based on the rotation state information updated by the process (main), the stop operation can be validated, while in the second prohibited state, the second That were performed just before the prohibited state Since the stop operation position can be specified based on the information regarding the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R updated by the interrupt processing (main), the number of steps from the reel reference position, etc. It is possible to make the timer interrupt process (main) as a reference during the process coincide.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the reel rotation start process before setting the acceptance of the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reel control process. In the reel rotation start process, a reel effect is performed using a reel, and after the reel effect is ended, a stop control table setting process is executed to perform stop control for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. It is the structure which sets.

  In such a configuration, since the stop control table is set after the end of the reel effect, the stop control table may not be set in time when the reel is not moved to the predetermined constant speed rotation after the reel effect. There is a risk that the activation of the stop operation will be delayed.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the reel rotation start process before setting the acceptance of the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reel control process. In the reel rotation start process, a reel effect is executed. As the reel effect, a first reel effect that stops the reel at a specific position and a second reel effect that does not stop the reel at a specific position are executed. When the first reel effect is executed in the reel rotation start process, the stop control table setting process is executed after the end of the first reel effect to stop all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. When the control table is set and the second reel effect is executed, the stop control table setting process is executed before the second reel effect is executed. Since the stop control table is set for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when the first reel effect is executed, the reels until the stop operation is validated when the first reel effect is ended. It is necessary to perform acceleration control in order to achieve constant speed rotation, and even if the stop control table is set after the end of the first reel effect, acceleration control is also performed. While the activation of the stop operation is not delayed as described above, when the second reel effect is executed, that is, the control for accelerating to make the reel rotate at a constant speed after the end of the second reel effect is performed. If less than the reel effect is required, the stop control table is set before the end of the second reel effect, that is, the stop control table is set before the end of the second reel effect. By complete and can be prevented from being delayed enabling stop operation by setting the stop control table.

  In addition, when the first reel effect is executed, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes a stop control table setting process after the first reel effect ends, and in the game, each reel 2L, 2C. Since the stop control table for performing the stop control for 2R is set, the area of the RAM 41c for setting the stop control table for stopping the reel with the first reel effect, and the stop control for stopping the reel in the game The area of the RAM 41c for setting the table can be a common predetermined area.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R so that predetermined symbols are aligned with the winning line LN at the end of the first reel effect, and then accelerates the reels to a constant speed rotation. When making the reels, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are delayed at random and started to rotate sequentially, but as a first reel effect, a predetermined symbol combination is stopped without being aligned with the winning line LN In addition, without controlling to randomly delay the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reels that are in a stopped state at the end of the first reel effect are set at the same timing as in the normal rotation start. A configuration may be adopted in which the engine is started and accelerated to a constant speed rotation. Even in such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, when the first reel effect is executed, the end of the first reel effect is achieved. In the structure for setting the stop control table after, it is never delayed enabling stop operation more than necessary by setting the stop control table.

  In the present embodiment, when executing the first reel effect, the main control unit 41 executes the stop control table setting process after the end of the first reel effect, so that all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are executed. The stop control table is set with respect to the first reel effect, but at least after the reel control using the stop control table is completed in the first reel effect, the stop control table may be set for the game. For example, even when the first reel is being produced, when the control for stopping the combination of predetermined stop symbols on the winning line LN is completed, the first reel is started by starting the stop control table setting process for the game. The stop control table may be set in parallel with the production control.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the second reel effect is executed, the main control unit 41 executes the stop control table setting process before starting the second reel effect, The stop control table is set for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, but the main control unit 41 may be configured to execute the stop control table setting process at least before the end of the second reel effect. The stop control table may be set while the reel effect is being executed, that is, in parallel with the control of the second reel effect.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b in the stop control table setting process, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed for each rotating reel. By setting another sliding frame number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c so that it can be specified, a stop control table is created and set in advance before a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel. The setting process may be a process for setting the stop control table in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in advance before the stop operation becomes valid for the rotating reel, and the stop control table stored in the ROM 41b is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A configuration in which the stop control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by copying to the ROM 41b. A configuration in which the stop control table stored in the compressed state is expanded and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to set the stop control table, and a part of the stop control table stored in the ROM 41b is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The stop control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by duplicating or expanding and setting, according to the timing when the stop operation is performed without referring to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b. A configuration in which a stop control table is created by searching and specifying a stop position that can be stopped and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for all stop operation timings, and set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in advance. A reference stop control table stored in the ROM 41b is stored in the RAM 41c. After setting to a predetermined area, a part of the stop control table is changed according to the game situation etc. to create a stop control table and set in advance in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and a combination of these structures is stopped. A configuration in which a control table is created and set may be used.

  In the reel rotation start process in the reel control process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the reel effect is performed. If it is determined that the reel effect is not performed, all the reels 2L and 2C are determined. After starting the control for accelerating 2R to a predetermined constant speed rotation, a stop control table setting process is executed to set a stop control table for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Since the stop control table is set before 2R becomes constant speed rotation, after the reels 2L, 2C, 2R become constant speed rotation, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R can be quickly activated. .

  In the embodiment, when it is determined that the reel effect is not performed in the reel rotation start process, the main control unit 41 starts control for accelerating all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Thereafter, a stop control table is set for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. However, when it is determined that no reel effect is to be performed, after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start to rotate, a predetermined control table is set. It is sufficient that the stop control table is set for the reel under rotation control until acceleration to constant speed rotation. When it is determined that the reel effect is not performed, the stop control table under rotation control is determined. After performing the setting, a configuration for executing a control for accelerating all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to a predetermined constant speed rotation, a control for accelerating the reels to a predetermined constant speed rotation, and a rotation control in progress And processing for setting the stop control table Lumpur may be configured to run in parallel.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can execute a second reel effect as a reel effect, in which a variation mode when accelerating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is different from that of a normal game. In the reel rotation start process at, when the second reel effect is executed, the stop control table setting process is executed before the end of the second reel effect, and the stop control table is set for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Therefore, even if the reels are rotated at a constant speed immediately after the end of the second reel effect, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R can be quickly validated.

  In the reel control process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment starts rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and then determines that the acceleration of all the reels has been completed and has reached constant speed rotation. After an acceleration completion command that can specify that the reel has been accelerated is set and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, in the reel control process, after the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start to rotate When a rotation error check process is executed and a rotation abnormality of any reel is detected, a re-acceleration manual process is executed to accelerate the corresponding reel again, and then it is determined that the reel has been rotated at a constant speed. In this case, the command is not transmitted without setting the acceleration completion command. Therefore, when the acceleration completion command is received on the sub-control unit 91 side, an abnormal rotation of the reel is caused. It is possible to specify that the first acceleration is completed after the game is started, not the completion of the acceleration again, and the sub-control unit 91 first sets all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to the constant speed rotation based on the acceleration completion command. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, an instruction for the first stop operation) accompanying the change.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is based on the lottery result of the internal lottery in the game in which a predetermined lottery role (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is won in the internal lottery. When the ART lottery to be performed is won, the reel effect is executed as the ART start effect in the game after the sign period has elapsed, that is, the internal lottery is performed in the game before the game that executes the reel effect. Since the reel presentation can be executed in response to the winning lottery winning, the ART lottery is performed as a specific condition established in the game prior to the game that executes the reel presentation, that is, predetermined by the internal lottery. If the lottery subject combination is won, the trend after that game can be watched.

  In the present embodiment, the specific condition established in the game prior to the game that executes the reel effect is that a predetermined lottery target role is won in the internal lottery prior to the game that executes the reel effect. However, it is sufficient that the condition is satisfied in the game before the game that executes the reel effect. For example, a predetermined number of games have been played before the game that executes the reel effect, or a game that executes the reel effect. A combination of predetermined symbols in a plurality of games before the game is stopped on the pay line LN, and a lottery executed independently of the internal lottery in the game before the reel execution game is won. Etc. In addition, the reel effect may be executed when a predetermined number of games elapses after the specific condition is satisfied, or the reel effect is executed when another condition is satisfied after the game where the specific condition is satisfied. The structure to do may be sufficient.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the ART lottery is won, the reel effect is executed as the ART start effect in the game after the preceding period has elapsed, and the reel is provided at a specific position as the reel effect. Although the first reel effect to be stopped is applied, the second reel effect that does not stop the reel at a specific position may be applied as the reel effect. When a predetermined lottery winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the trend after the game can be noticed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs an ART possibility suggestion effect lottery in a game in which a predetermined lottery role (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is won in the internal lottery. When the ART possibility suggesting effect lottery is won, the reel effect can be executed as the ART possibility suggesting effect in the game, so that a predetermined lottery target role is won in the internal lottery as a predetermined condition. Can be noticed.

  In this embodiment, when an ART possibility suggesting effect lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery subject is won in the internal lottery and the ART possibility suggesting effect lottery is won, the ART possibility suggesting effect lottery is performed. In the game in which the internal lottery was triggered, the reel effect is executed as the ART possibility suggesting effect. The reel effect as the ART possibility suggesting effect is a predetermined condition in the game that performs the reel effect. May be executed based on the fact that is established, and may be executed based on the establishment of conditions other than the internal lottery (such as the winning result of the ART lottery).

  In the present embodiment, when the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won, the reel effect is executed as the ART possibility suggestion effect in the game won for the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery. Although the second reel effect that does not stop the reel at a specific position is applied as the effect, the first reel effect that stops the reel at a specific position may be applied as the reel effect. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the trend after the game when a predetermined lottery winning combination is won in the internal lottery.

  When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment wins an ART lottery performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery role (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is won in the internal lottery In the game in which the reel effect can be executed as the ART start effect after the precursor period elapses, and in the game in which a predetermined lottery target role is won in the internal lottery, an ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is performed, When the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery is won, the reel effect can be executed as the ART possibility suggestion effect in the game, and the ART start effect is executed in the game won the ART possibility suggestion effect lottery. When doing this, the execution of the ART possibility suggesting effect is restricted and only the ART start effect is executed. In a situation where the reel production is determined to be executed in advance based on the winning of the predetermined lottery target in the internal lottery, the predetermined lottery target winning in the internal lottery was further won as a predetermined condition. By limiting the reel effect based on this, the control associated with executing the reel effect does not become complicated.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes the stop control table setting process in the reel control process, and sets the stop control table for performing the stop control for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. It is the structure to do.

  In such a configuration, when one reel is stopped while a plurality of reels are rotating, the stop control table is further set for the remaining reels after the stopped reel is stopped. If it does in this way, after the stop of one reel, there exists a possibility that the setting of the stop control table about the remaining reels may not be in time, or the activation of the stop operation may be delayed.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the stop control table setting process when a valid stop operation is detected in the reel control process, and performs the remaining rotation control. After setting the stop control table for the reels and then determining that all the reels are not stopped, control is performed to detect the stop operation for the remaining reels. When the stop switch corresponding to the reel is operated, the stop control table is set for the other reels under rotation control before the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped, and the stop control table is set. It is possible to prevent the activation of the stop switch from being delayed.

  In the stop control table setting process executed in the reel control process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not there is an unstopped reel. The process of setting the stop control table for one of the reels is sequentially performed for all the unreacted reels, so that one of the reels is controlled during the rotation control of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When a corresponding stop switch is operated, the other two rotation control stop control tables are set before the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped. When the stop switch corresponding to the reel is operated, the reel stop control during another rotation control is performed before the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped. Since setting the Buru, set by the stop switch 8L of stop control table In either situation, 8C, that enabling 8R is delayed it can be prevented.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the reel control process in the main process, and periodically interrupts the main process while executing the timer interrupt process (main). It is configured to execute a table setting process to set a stop control table for reels under rotation control. In the control table setting process, the system waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, and the timer interrupt process ( Each time (main) is executed, the control for setting the stop control table for one reel under rotation control is repeatedly executed to set the stop control table for all reels under rotation control. The control does not become complicated by unintentionally executing the timer interrupt process (main) during the period in which the setting process is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets the stop control table for one reel under rotation control every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed in the control table setting process executed in the reel control process. The process of setting the stop control table for all reels under rotation control by repeatedly executing the control to set the value is divided and executed for each reel under rotation control. Any process may be used as long as the process for setting the stop control table for all reels under rotation control is divided into a plurality of processes so that one process is completed in a time less than the time interval at which the process (main) is executed. For example, the process of setting a stop control table for one reel under rotation control is divided into a plurality of stages, and a timer interrupt process (main) is performed each time one stage is completed. After row, by repeating the control to execute the processing of the next step for all the reels in rotation control it may be configured to set the stop control table. Even in such a configuration, the control is not complicated by executing the timer interrupt process (main) at an unintended timing in the period during which the stop control table setting process is performed.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs a freeze lottery when a predetermined lottery role (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry) is won in the internal lottery, and the stop freeze is won in the freeze lottery. In this case, when a stop switch corresponding to one of the reels is operated during rotation control of a plurality of reels, delay processing for delaying the activation of the stop switch corresponding to another reel under rotation control is performed. When a stop operation by an effective stop switch is detected in the reel control process, control is performed to stop the reel corresponding to the stop operation, and the other reels under rotation control are stopped. After performing the control table setting process, the delay process is executed, that is, the delay process is executed based on winning the freeze lottery. Expediently, since setting the reel stop control table in the other rotational control before starting the delay processing, after completion of the delay process, it can be enabled promptly stop switch operation.

  FIGS. 17 to 19 are diagrams for explaining the types of roles, symbol combinations, and technical matters related to the roles in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the symbol combination of the transfer event and the technical matters related to the transfer event in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an outline of the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the special combination of the winning combinations includes two types of bonuses: a big bonus (hereinafter, big bonus is referred to as BB) and a regular bonus (hereinafter, regular bonus is referred to as RB). BB is won when a combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is aligned on the winning line LN at RT0-4. When winning the BB, the game shifts to a big bonus that is controlled every game by a regular bonus (to be referred to as RB hereinafter). The big bonus ends on condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out. RB is awarded when the combination of “blue 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on the winning line LN at RT0-4. When winning an RB, the game proceeds to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB). The regular bonus ends on the condition that any combination wins 6 times or 12 games have been consumed. As shown in FIG. 21, RT4 is controlled from winning BB or RB until winning, and after the big bonus or regular bonus (collectively referred to as bonus) is finished, it is controlled by RT3. The Rukoto.

  As shown in FIG. 18, among the winning combinations, the upper bell 1, the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, the upper bell 4, the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, the upper bell 8, and the middle bell are included. , Right-down bell, middle-stage watermelon, right-down watermelon, horn cherry 1, and horn cherry 2. In the following description, when it is not necessary to distinguish the upper bell 1, the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, the upper bell 4, the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, and the upper bell 8, they are simply referred to as upper bells. .

  The upper bell 1 has “Replay a-Cherry a-Cherry a”, “Replay a-Cherry a-White 7”, “Replay a-Cherry a-BAR”, “Replay a” in the winning line LN in any gaming state. -Cherry b-Cherry a "," Replay a-Cherry b-White 7 "," Replay a-Cherry b-BAR "combination was awarded, and the top bell 1 won in any gaming state Sometimes 8 medals are paid out. The top bell 2 wins when the combination of “Replay a-Cherry a-Plum” and “Replay a-Cherry b-Plum” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. When the upper bell 2 wins, 8 medals are paid out. The upper bell 3 is displayed when the combination of “Replay a-Plum-Cherry a”, “Replay a-Plum-White 7”, and “Replay a-Plum-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. Winning is won and 8 medals are paid out when the upper bell 3 wins in any gaming state. The upper bell 4 wins when the combination of “replay a-plum-plum” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and eight medals when the upper bell 4 wins in any gaming state. Will be paid out. The upper bell 5 has “Replay b-Cherry a-Cherry a”, “Replay b-Cherry a-White 7”, “Replay b-Cherry a-BAR”, “Replay b” in the winning line LN in any gaming state. -Cherry b-Cherry a "," Replay b-Cherry b-White 7 "," Replay b-Cherry b-BAR "combination was awarded, and the upper bell 5 won in any gaming state Sometimes 8 medals are paid out. The top bell 6 wins when the combination of “Replay b-Cherry a-Plum” and “Replay b-Cherry b-Plum” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. When the upper bell 6 wins, 8 medals are paid out. The upper bell 7 is displayed when the combination of “Replay b-Plum-Cherry a”, “Replay b-Plum-White 7”, and “Replay b-Plum-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. Winning is won and 8 medals are paid out when the upper bell 7 wins in any gaming state. The upper bell 8 wins when the combination of “Replay a-plum-plum” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and 8 medals when the upper bell 8 wins in any gaming state Will be paid out. The combination of symbols constituting the upper bell 1 to the upper bell 8 is aligned with the winning line LN, so that the combination of “bell-bell-bell” can be aligned with the invalid line LM1.

  The middle bell wins when the combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and 8 medals are paid out when the middle bell wins in any gaming state. . The right-down bells appear on the winning line LN in any gaming state, as “Replay a-bell-red 7”, “Replay a-bell-replay a”, “Replay b-bell-red 7”, “Replay b-bell”. -When a combination of "Replay a" is completed, a prize is awarded. In any gaming state, when the right-down bell is awarded, eight medals are paid out.

  The middle stage watermelon is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and five medals are paid out when the middle stage watermelon is awarded in any gaming state. . A right-down watermelon is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry b” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and 5 medals when a right-down watermelon wins in any gaming state. Will be paid out. When the combination of symbols constituting the right-down watermelon is aligned with the winning line LN, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  Corner Cherry 1 wins when the combination of “Red 7-Bell-Bell” and “BAR-Bell-Bell” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. When winning, one medal is paid out. Corner Cherry 2 wins when the combination of “Red 7-Bell-Replay a” and “BAR-Bell-Replay a” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. When Cherry 2 wins, one medal is paid out.

  As shown in FIG. 19, among the winning combinations, the replaying players include middle replay, right-up replay, promotion replay, special replay, tumble replay, red 7 complete replay, red 7 missing replay, blue 7 complete replay, blue 7 Includes missing replays.

  The middle stage replay is awarded when the combination of “Replay a-Replay a-Replay a” and “Replay b-Replay a-Replay a” is completed on the winning line LN at RT0 to RT4, and the replay game (replay) is played. Is granted. A replay that goes up to the right is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Replay a-Red 7” or “Bell-Replay a-Bell” is aligned on the winning line LN in RT1 to RT4, and a replay game (replay) is given. The The promotion replay is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay a-replay a” is arranged on the winning line LN at RT1, and a replay game (replay) is given. The special replay is awarded when a combination of “replay a-replay a-bell” and “replay b-replay a-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN at RT0, and a replay game (replay) is given. The fall replays are “Bell-Red 7-Cherry a”, “Bell-Red 7-Watermelon”, “Bell-Red 7-Plum”, “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry a”, “ "Bel-Watermelon-Watermelon", "Bell-Watermelon-Plum", "Bell-Cherry a-Cherry a", "Bell-Cherry a-Watermelon", "Bell-Cherry a-Plum" Thus, a replay game (replay) is given. The red 7-match replay is awarded when the combination of “Replay b-Blue 7-Replay a” is aligned on the winning line LN at RT2, and a replay game (replay) is given. Red 7 spilled replays include “Replay a-Blue 7-Replay a”, “Replay a-Watermelon-Replay a”, “Replay a-Cherry a-Replay a”, “Replay b-Watermelon-” on the winning line LN at RT2. When a combination of “Replay a” and “Replay b-Cherry a-Replay a” is completed, a prize is won and a replay game (replay) is given. The blue 7 uniform replay is awarded when the combination of “Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay a” is aligned on the winning line LN at RT2, and a replay game (replay) is given. Blue 7 spilled replays include “Cherry a-Watermelon-Replay a”, “Cherry a-Cherry a-Replay a”, “Bell-Blue 7-Replay a”, “Bell-Watermelon-Replay a” on the winning line LN at RT2. ”Or“ Bell-Cherry a-Replay a ”combination is awarded and a replay game (replay) is awarded.

  When the combination of “Replay b-Blue 7-Replay a” constituting the red 7-matched replay is aligned with the winning line LN, the combination of “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7” can be aligned with the invalid line LM2. In addition, the combination of “Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay a” constituting the blue 7-match replay is aligned with the winning line LN, so that the combination of “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7” is aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the transition items are “Replay a-Cherry a-Bell”, “Replay a-Cherry b-Bell”, “Replay a-Plum-Bell”, “Replay b-Cherry a-Bell”. , "Replay b-Cherry b-Bell", "Replay b-Plum-Bell", "Replay a-Bell-Cherry a", "Replay a-Bell-White 7", "Replay a-Bell-BAR", " Replay a-bell-plum, Replay b-bell-cherry a, Replay b-bell-white 7, Replay b-bell-BAR, Replay b-bell-plum, Bell-cherry "a-cherry a", "bell-cherry a-white 7", "bell-cherry a-BAR", "bell-cherry a-plum", "bell-cherry b-cherry a", "bell-cherry b-" "White 7", "Belch “Lee b-BAR”, “Bell-Cherry b-Plum”, “Bell-Plum-Cherry a”, “Bell-Plum-White 7”, “Bell-Plum-BAR”, “Bell-Plum-Plum” When RT0, RT2 and RT3 are aligned with the winning line LN, the process shifts to RT1. In this embodiment, the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4 are elected, the reels other than the reels which are the winning conditions for the middle bell are set as the first stop, and the elected upper bell is missed. In this case, the transfer outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23 to FIG. 27, combinations of lottery object combinations that are read as lottery object combinations for each gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, the role to be subject to the internal lottery or whether the game state is RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, or RB (including RB in BB) At least one of the winning probabilities is different. As will be described later as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be read out simultaneously and can be won in duplicate. In FIG. 23 to FIG. 27, “+” is written between winning winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is simultaneously read out in the internal lottery. In FIG. 23 to FIG. 25, the lottery object combination is shown in the vertical column, and the gaming state is shown in the horizontal column. In the column where the gaming state intersects with the lottery target, a circle indicates that it is a lottery target when in the gaming state, and a cross indicates that it is not a lottery target when in the gaming state. It shows that. Also, the numerical values shown below the circles indicate the number of determination values of a predetermined set value (common in this embodiment regardless of the set value). An internal lottery is performed using the number of determination values. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” corresponding to a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). For this reason, for example, the winning probability of the lottery subject for which “300” is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536. FIG. 23 shows combinations of special combinations that are read as lottery targets for each gaming state, FIGS. 24 and 25 show combinations of small roles that are read as lottery targets for each gaming state, and FIG. , A combination of re-playing combinations that are read out as lottery targets.

  When the gaming state is RT0, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, The replay GR11, the replay GR12, the replay GR13, the replay GR14, the replay GR15, and the replay GR16 are subject to internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT1, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, Replay GR1, Replay GR2, Replay GR3, Replay GR4, Replay GR5, and Replay GR6 are targeted for internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT2, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, The replay GR21, the replay GR22, the replay GR23, the replay GR24, the replay GR25, and the replay GR26 are targeted for internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT3, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay It becomes a target for internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT4, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, and normal replay are the subject of internal lottery. When the gaming state is RB, strong cherries, weak cherries, watermelons, and common bells are targeted for internal lottery.

  The left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, the right bell 1 to 4, the common bell, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, and the watermelon are combinations or combinations of combinations shown in FIG. 26, respectively. In the following, when it is not particularly necessary to distinguish, left bells 1 to 4 are simply referred to as left bells, middle bells 1 to 4 are simply referred to as middle bells, and right bells 1 to 4 are simply referred to as right bells. There is. Moreover, when it is not necessary to distinguish any of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4, they may be simply referred to as push order bells.

  The normal replay, replay GR1 to 6, replay GR11 to 16, and replay GR21 to 26 are combinations of roles shown in FIG. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the replays GR1 to 6, the replays GR11 to 16, and the replays GR21 to 26, they may be simply referred to as push order replays.

  In the present embodiment, when the push order bell is won, as shown in FIG. 28, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs according to the type of the push order bell and the stop order. For example, if the left bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of the middle bell stops at the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop or in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop, either the combination of the upper bell 1 and the upper bell 8 or the transition outcome is Stop at the winning line LN. The same applies to the left bells 2 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4. As shown in FIG.

  Specifically, when the reel in which the push order bell is won and the middle bell is awarded as the first stop is stopped, the bell design is stopped at the middle of the reel, and then the remaining By performing the reel stop operation, the “bell” is also stopped at the middle stage of the remaining reels, and the combination of the middle stage bells is aligned with the winning line LN.

  On the other hand, when the pushing bell is elected and a reel other than the reel that the middle bell wins as the first stop is operated, the first stop reel and the second stop reel are elected. The upper bell (in the case of the left bell, "Replay a" or "Replay b" for the left reel, "Cherry a", "Cherry b" or "Plum" for the middle reel, and for the right reel “Cherry a”, “White 7”, “BAR” or “Plum”) can be stopped at the middle stage, and when the two reels stop, the winning upper bell can be stopped at the winning line LN Situation (If left bell 1, "Replay a-Cherry a / Cherry b-Rotating", "Replay a-Rotating-Cherry a / White 7 / BAR", "Replay b-Plum-Rotating" "Replay b-rotating-plum"), and if the third stop reel is stopped at a timing at which the winning upper bell can be pulled in, the middle stage of the third stop reel The winning top bell constituent symbols are stopped, the winning top bell combination is aligned with the winning line LN, and the winning top bell constituent symbols are arranged at a timing other than the timing at which the third stopping reel can be pulled in. If the stop operation has been performed, the “bell” is stopped at the middle stage of the third stop reel, and the transition output combination (if the left bell is 1, “replay a-cherry a / cherry b-bell”, “Replay a-Bell-Cherry a / White 7 / BAR”, “Replay b-Plum-Bell”, “Replay b-Bell-Plum”) are aligned to the winning line LN. When the two reels are stopped, the winning upper bell cannot be stopped on the winning line LN (if the left bell is 1, “Replay b-Cherry a / Cherry b-Rotating”, “ Replay b-rotating-cherry a / white 7 / BAR "," replay a-plum-rotating "," replay a-rotating-plum ") Regardless, stop the “bell” in the middle of the third stop reel, and if it is left bell 1, the combination of “replay b-cherry a / cherry b-bell”, “replay b-bell- "Cherry a / White 7 / BAR", "Replay a-Plum-Bell", "Replay a-Bell-Plum") on the winning line LN. Further, when the transition outcomes are aligned with the winning line LN, the invalid line LM1 has a combination of “other than bell-bell-bell”, “other than bell-bell-bell”, and “other than bell-bell-bell”.

  For this reason, when the push order bell is won, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the operation is performed in the stop order according to the type of the push order bell. In other words, even if one of the push order bells is won, if the type is not known, it is not possible to intentionally select the stop order according to the type, and if the stop order matches, the middle bell is definitely won By doing so, medals can be obtained with certainty, but if the stopping order does not match, medals can be obtained only at a certain rate. In particular, in RT0 and RT2, since the transition point stops when the stop order does not match, if the stop order does not match, the transition to RT1 occurs at a certain rate. In this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the middle bell wins at an equal rate and 8 medals can be obtained, so the player performs the stop operation in any stop order. Can be prevented from becoming extremely disadvantageous.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the transition outcome can be stopped, and even if the stop operation is performed at any timing, the transition is surely performed. The timing for avoiding the exit is not present, and the stop of the transition exit cannot be intentionally avoided unless the type of the push order bell is known.

  In this embodiment, when the pushing order bell is won, if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode in which the middle or upper bell can be won, the transitional outcome is always stopped. However, if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode in which the middle bell or the upper bell cannot be won at the time of winning the push order bell, the transition start or miss, that is, the symbol that does not generate any winnings It may be configured to stop a combination of symbols that is a combination and that is not a symbol combination that constitutes the transition outcome.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays GR1 to GR6 are elected, as shown in FIG. 29, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs according to the type and stop order. For example, when replay GR1 (middle replay + promotion replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of stop in the middle left and right, the combination of promotion replay stops in the winning line LN and the stop order other than the left center right When the stop operation is performed at, the middle stage replay combination is stopped at the winning line LN. The same applies to the replays GR2 to GR6. As shown in FIG. 29, the combination of symbols to be stopped is different according to the type and stop order. For this reason, when replay GR1-6 is won in RT1, the promotion replay wins by operating in the stop order corresponding to the type, but if the type is not known, intentionally select the stop order according to the type If the stop order matches, it is possible to shift to RT0 by winning the promoted replay. However, if the stop order does not match, RT1 is maintained. In this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the promotion replay wins at an equal rate and shifts to RT0. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays GR11 to 16 are elected, as shown in FIG. 30, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs according to the type and stop order. For example, when the replay GR11 (special replay + middle stage replay + falling replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of stopping with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of the middle stage replay stops at the winning line LN, When the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the middle reel as the first stop, the combination of special replays stops at the winning line LN, and when the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the right reel as the first stop The combination of fall replay stops on the winning line LN. When replay GR12 (special replay + middle replay + fall replay + right replay) is selected and the stop operation is performed in the order of stop with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of middle replay stops at the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the falling replays is stopped on the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop. In this case, the special replay combination stops on the winning line LN. When replay GR13 (special replay + middle stage replay + tumble replay + red 7 complete replay) is selected and the stop operation is performed in the order of stop with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of tumble replay is placed on the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the middle stage replay is stopped on the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop. If this happens, the special replay combination stops at the winning line LN. When replay GR14 (special replay + middle replay + tumble replay + red 7-match replay + right-up replay) is selected and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the special replay combination is When stopping at the winning line LN and performing a stop operation in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the middle stage replays stops at the winning line LN and in the stop order with the right reel being the first stop. When the stop operation is performed, the combination of the fall replay stops on the winning line LN. When replay GR15 (special replay + middle replay + tumble replay + blue 7 complete replay) is selected and the stop operation is performed in the order of stop with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of special replay is placed on the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the tumble replay is stopped on the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop. If this happens, the middle stage replay combination stops on the winning line LN. When replay GR16 (special replay + middle stage replay + tumble replay + blue 7-match replay + right-up replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of tumble replay is When stopping at the winning line LN and performing a stop operation in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the special replay combination stops at the winning line LN and in the stop order with the right reel as the first stop. When the stop operation is performed, the middle stage replay combination stops on the pay line LN.

  For this reason, when the replays GR11 to 16 are won at RT0, special replays are won by operating in the stop order corresponding to the type, but if the type is not known, the stop order according to the type is intentionally If the operated stop order matches the stop order corresponding to the middle replay, RT0 can be maintained by winning the middle replay and matches the stop order corresponding to the special replay. Then, it is possible to shift to RT2 by winning the special replay, but if the stop order corresponding to the middle replay and the stop order corresponding to the special replay do not match, the fall replay wins and moves to RT1. May end up. In this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the middle stage replay wins and RT0 is maintained at an equal rate, the special replay wins and moves to RT2, and the fall replay wins. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming extremely disadvantageous regardless of the stop order in which the player performs the stop operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, RT0 is maintained when replay GR11, 12 is won at RT0, when replay GR13, 14 is won at RT0, and when replay GR15, 16 is won at RT0. The stop order (first stop reel) in which the replay is won differs from the stop order (first stop reel) in which the special replay that moves to RT2 is won. In addition, when the replays GR11 and 12 are won at RT0, the stop order (first stop reel) for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained is the same, but when the replay GR11 is won and the replay GR12 The stop order (first stop reel) in which the special replay for shifting to RT2 is won is different from the case where is won. The same applies when the replays GR13 and 14 are won at RT0 and the replays GR15 and 16 are won at RT0. For this reason, even if the stop order for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained is specified, the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 from the stop order cannot be specified.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays GR21 to 23 are elected, as shown in FIG. 30, the combination of symbols to be stopped is different according to the type and stop order. For example, when replay GR21 (red 7-match replay + red 7 missed replay + promotion replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the left reel or the middle reel is the first stop, the red 7-match replay or When the combination of red 7 missed replay stops at the winning line LN and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the right reel as the first stop, the promoted replay combination stops at the winning line LN. The same applies to the replays GR22 and 23, and as shown in FIG. 30, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs according to the type and the order of stoppage. For this reason, when replay GR21-23 is selected in RT2, red 7-match replay or red 7 missed replay is won by operating in order of stop according to the type, but if that type is not known, that type is intentionally However, if the stop order matches, RT2 can be maintained by winning the red 7-match replay or red 7 missed replay, but if the stop order does not match The promotion replay may win and move to RT0. In this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the red 7-match replay or red 7 missed replay wins and maintains RT2 at an equal rate, so the player stops in any stop order. Even if the operation is performed, it can be prevented from becoming extremely disadvantageous.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays GR24 to 26 are elected, as shown in FIG. 30, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs according to the type and stop order. For example, if Replay GR24 (Blue 7 Match Replay + Blue 7 Missing Replay + Promotion Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel or middle reel as the first stop, When the combination of the blue 7 missed replay stops on the pay line LN and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the right reel as the first stop, the promoted replay combination stops on the pay line LN. The same applies to the replays GR25 and 26, and as shown in FIG. 30, the combination of symbols to be stopped is different according to the type and stop order. For this reason, when the replay GR24-26 is selected in RT2, a blue 7-match replay or a blue 7 missed replay is won by operating in the order of stop according to the type. If the stop order matches, the RT2 can be maintained by winning a blue 7-match replay or blue 7 missed replay, but if the stop order does not match The promotion replay may win and move to RT0. In this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the blue 7-match replay or blue 7 missed replay wins and maintains RT2 at an equal rate, so the player stops in any stop order. Even if the operation is performed, it can be prevented from becoming extremely disadvantageous.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, it is controlled to either RT0 to RT4 or bonus (RB in RB or BB). RT0 shifts by winning a promotion replay at RT1 and RT2. Regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT0, RT0 transitions to RT1 by winning a fall replay or stopping the transition, or transitions to RT2 by winning a special replay, or a special role is won And it complete | finishes by transfering to RT4. The medal payout rate per game exceeds 100% when the stop operation is performed in the order of stop according to the navigation notification, and becomes 100% or less when the navigation notification is not executed. RT1 shifts at RT0, RT2, RT3 when a fall replay is won or when a transition is stopped. Then, RT1 ends by shifting to RT0 by winning a promotion replay or shifting to RT4 by winning a special role, regardless of the number of games since shifting to RT1. The payout rate of medals per game is less than 100%. RT2 shifts by winning a special replay at RT0. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT2, RT2 transitions to RT0 due to the promotion replay winning, transitions to RT1 due to the stop of the transitional outcome, or transitions to RT4 due to the winning of special role. That's it. The medal payout rate per game exceeds 100% when the stop operation is performed in the order of stop according to the navigation notification, and becomes 100% or less when the navigation notification is not executed. RT3 shifts to the end of the bonus (BB, RB). Then, RT3 is terminated by transitioning to RT1 by stopping the transition or regardless of the number of games since transitioning to RT3, or by transitioning to RT4 by winning a special role. The payout rate of medals per game is less than 100%. RT4 shifts by winning special roles (BB, RB) in RT0-3. RT4 ends when the special combination that triggered the transition to RT4 wins and shifts to a bonus (BB or RB) regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT4. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% both when the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification and when the navigation notification is not executed. RB shifts due to RB winning in RT4. Then, the RB ends when 12 games are digested or 6 times are won. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%. BB shifts by winning BB at RT4. The BB ends when the total number of medals paid out during the BB exceeds a specified number (316 in this embodiment) regardless of the number of games since the transition to the BB. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%.

  Among RT0 to 4, RB, and BB (RB), RB and BB have the highest medal payout rate per game and are the most advantageous gaming state. RT0, RT2 and RT4 of RT0-4 have a higher probability of winning a re-gamer, and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT1 and 3, compared to RT1 and RT3. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player. RT0, 2 of RT0, 2, 4 can be said to be more advantageous to the player than RT4 in that the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT4. RT2 can be said to be more advantageous to the player than RT0 in that there is a high possibility that the number of ART games described later will be added.

  Further, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is RT0 to 2, the main control unit 41 can execute navigation notification that notifies the player of the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period.

  When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 performs navigation notification by winning the notification target combination corresponding to the gaming state, and the first internal winning command to the sub control unit 91 By transmitting the second internal winning command and the pressing order command, the navigation control by the sub-control unit 91 is executed. The notification target combination corresponding to the gaming state is replay GR1 to 6 when pushing RT1, push order bell when it is RT0, replay GR11 to 16 when pushing RT, replay GR21 to 26 when it is RT2, Pushing bell. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes navigation notification by satisfying certain conditions even in a normal state (RT1 and non-AT state) where neither AT nor ART is controlled. It is possible to execute a navigation effect. The navigation notification of the present embodiment notifies the stop order advantageous for the player in an identifiable manner by changing the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. The navigation notification mode will be described in detail later.

  The navigation effect of the present embodiment notifies the stop order advantageous for the player notified by the navigation notification by displaying the navigation image from the liquid crystal display 51 and the output of the navigation sound from the speakers 53 and 54. For example, when informing the stop order of the left middle right stop switch 8L such as “123” (indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop), A stop order image indicating the stop order of 8C and 8R is displayed. In addition, as the navigation voice, for example, “left middle right!” (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop) Is output. Further, when the stop order in which the left reel is first stopped is notified, the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R such as “1--” (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is indicated. Display stop order images. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, “left!” (Indicating that the left reel is in the first stop) (indicating that the left reel is in the first stop) indicating the stop switch stop order is output. To do. In particular, when the replay GRs 21 to 26 are elected at RT2 and the stop order in which the red 7 complete replay, red 7 missing replay or blue 7 complete replay, blue 7 missing replay wins is notified, the stop order image described above. In addition, an image prompting a stop operation at a timing targeting red 7 and blue 7 is also displayed on each reel, and a stop operation at that timing is prompted. In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient if a player is distinguishable according to a winning condition. The navigation effect is not limited to the one using the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54, but may be executed using the effect effects LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  In the navigation notification and the navigation effect, when any of the replays GR1 to GR6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the promotion replay wins is identifiable so as to be identifiable. In addition, when any of the replays GR11 to 16 is won at RT0, the stop order in which the middle stage replay or special replay wins is notified in an identifiable manner. Further, when any of the replays GR21 to 23 is won in RT2 and the number of guaranteed games to be described later remains, the stop order in which the red 7 uniform replay and red 7 missed replay wins is identifiable. Further, when any one of the replays GR24 to 26 is won at RT2 and the number of guaranteed games to be described later remains, the stop order in which the blue 7 uniform replay and the blue 7 missed replay wins is identifiable.

  As described above, in the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the stop order that is advantageous to the player is notified in an identifiable manner. For this reason, the player can intentionally win a promotion replay at RT1 and shift to RT0, or win a middle bell at RT0 by performing stop operations in the order of stop according to the navigation effect. Maintaining RT0 by winning middle replay, winning special replay and moving to RT2, avoiding falling replay winning, winning middle bell, and avoiding stopping transition Yes, in RT2, red 7 complete replay, red 7 spill replay, blue 7 complete replay, blue 7 spill replay can be awarded to maintain RT2, middle bells can be awarded, and transitional stops can be avoided. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls to ART (a state controlled by AT at RT0) when the lottery condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell win). ART lottery to determine whether or not. Further, the main control unit 41 can control the precursor period indicating the possibility of winning the ART lottery over a predetermined period (number of games), and determines the length of the precursor period according to the result of the ART lottery. A lottery will be drawn. Then, the main control unit 41 wins the ART lottery and controls the ART when the precursor period determined by the precursor period lottery has elapsed.

  When controlling to ART, first control to AT. The state from the start of the AT control to the transition to RT0 is also referred to as a preparation state. The main control unit 41 performs navigation notification when the target combination is won in the preparation state. At this time, in RT1, when the replays GR1 to 6 are won, navigation notification is performed, and when the replays GR1 to 6 are won, the stop order for winning the promoted replay is notified by the navigation notification, so stop according to the notified stop order. By performing the operation, it is possible to shift the promotion replay from RT1 to RT0. In addition, after the transition to the ready state, the stop order for winning the middle bell when the push order bell is won is notified, so that the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order, so that eight medals can be reliably obtained. It becomes possible.

  The main control unit 41 finishes the preparation state when the promoted replay wins at RT1, and starts the ART control. Accordingly, the main control unit 41 sets the predetermined number of games as the number of remaining ART games allocated to the RAM 91c, and starts counting the number of remaining ART games. After the ART starts, the stop order for winning the middle bell when the push order bell is won will be notified, so it is possible to reliably acquire 8 medals by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. At the same time, it is possible to avoid stopping the transition event and winning the fall replay and avoiding the transition to RT1. In addition, when the extra state lottery described later is not won, the stop order for winning the middle stage replay when the replays GR11 to 16 are won is notified by the navigation notification, so the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order. This makes it possible to maintain the RT0 by winning the middle stage replay.

  Further, after the start of ART, every time one game is consumed, the number of remaining games is decremented by 1, and when the remaining number of games becomes 0, the AT control is terminated. As a result, the navigation notification is not executed, so it becomes impossible to avoid the stop of the transitional outcome when winning the push order bell, and it is impossible to avoid the winning of the fall replay when winning the replay GR11-16. By shifting to RT1 by stopping the game or winning the fall replay, a series of AT and ART controls are completed.

  Also, after the start of ART, if the lottery condition (winning of watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, common bell) is satisfied before the remaining number of games becomes 0, it is determined whether or not to increase the number of ART games. Add lottery. When the winning lottery is won, an ART game number lottery for determining the number of ART games is performed, and the number of games won in the ART game number lottery is added to the remaining number of ART games.

  Further, after the start of ART, when the lottery condition (strong cherry winning) is established before the remaining number of games becomes 0, the state shifts to an added state in which the probability that the number of ART games will be added is higher than during ART. Addition state lottery to determine whether or not. And, when the winning state lottery is won, the stop order for winning the special replay when the replays GR11 to 16 are won is notified by the navigation notification, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order. It is possible to shift to RT2 by winning a special replay.

  When shifting to RT2 due to winning the added state lottery, the ART is interrupted, and the counting of the number of ART games is also interrupted, and the added state is shifted. The added state continues until the promotion replay wins or the transitional game stops, and during that time, every time any role wins, the ART game number lottery is performed, and the number of games won in the ART game number lottery is determined. Add to the number of remaining games in ART. In particular, when the red 7 replay or red 7 missed replay is won, the average number of games won in the ART game number lottery is set higher than when other roles win, and the blue 7 replay or blue 7 When the missed replay wins, the average number of games won in the ART game number lottery is set higher than when the red 7 replay or red 7 missed replay wins.

  In the added state, until the guaranteed number of games is reached, the stop order for winning the red 7 replay or red 7 missed replay when the replay GR 21 to 23 is won is notified by the navigation notification, and when the replay GR 24 to 26 is won the blue 7 replay or Since the stop order for winning the blue 7 missed replay is notified by the navigation notification, the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order to avoid the end of RT2 due to the promotion replay winning, that is, the end of the added state. 7 replays, red 7 missed replays, blue 7 replays or blue 7 missed replays can be won to add more games to the remaining number of games on the ART than when winning other roles. In addition, after reaching the guaranteed number of games, navigation notification is not executed when the replays GR21-26 are won, so it is impossible to avoid the promotion replay winning when the replays GR21-26 are won, and the promotion replay wins By shifting to RT0, the added state is terminated, and counting of ART and ART games is resumed.

  In addition, in the added state, regardless of whether or not the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the stop order for winning the middle bell when the push order bell is won is notified, so by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order As a result, eight medals can be obtained with certainty, and stoppage of the transition outcome can be avoided and the transition to RT1 can be avoided.

  Further, after the start of ART, if a special combination is won before the remaining number of games becomes 0, the ART is interrupted by the end of RT2, and the counting of the number of ART games is also interrupted accordingly. When a special combination is won during ART, navigation notification is not performed even if the push order bell is won until the special combination wins.

  If the special role is won during ART and the ART is interrupted, the bonus is controlled after the winning special role is won, and the transition is stopped at RT3 after the bonus ends, and RT1 At this time, the AT control is resumed, and the ART is resumed by moving again to RT0 through the preparation state, and the counting of the remaining number of games of the ART is also resumed.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 notifies the stop order in which the middle bell wins by navigation notification when the push order bell is won during ART or in the added state, and ignores the notified stop order. When the stop operation is performed, the upper bell may win and RT0 or RT2 may be maintained, but the transitional outcome may stop and shift to RT1. If the transition is made from RT0 or RT2 to RT1 during ART or in an added state, the added state will end, but the ART will continue, and the number of remaining games in the ART will be decremented by 1 every time one game is completed Similarly, the stop order for winning the promoted replay at the time of winning the replays GR1 to 6 at RT1 is notified by the navigation notification, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order to win the promoted replay and from RT1 to RT0. It is possible to migrate.

  In this embodiment, when the middle replay that maintains RT0 at RT0 and the special replay that shifts to RT2, which is more advantageous to the player than RT0, are won at the same time, the stop order in which the middle replay wins and the stop that special replay wins In the case where the order is different from the stop order, and the addition state lottery is not won, the stop order in which the middle stage replay wins is notified by navigation notification to prompt the stop operation in the notified stop order, and RT0 Is supposed to be maintained.

  In such a configuration, even if the stop order for maintaining RT0 is notified by the navigation notification, the stop order for shifting from the notified stop order to RT2 may be specified, and the stop for maintaining RT0 may be specified. In spite of the notification of the order, there is a possibility that the operation is intentionally performed in the stop order in which the process proceeds to RT2.

  In contrast, in this embodiment, RT0 is maintained when the replays GR11 and 12 are won at RT0, when the replays GR13 and 14 are won at RT0, and when the replays GR15 and 16 are won at RT0. When the stop order for winning the middle stage replay is different from the stop order for winning the special replay that moves to RT2, and when the replays GR11 and 12 are elected at RT0, the stop order for winning the middle stage replay where both RT0s are maintained The order is the same, but when the replay GR11 is won and when the replay GR12 is won, the stop order for winning the special replay that moves to RT2 is different. When the replays GR13 and 14 are won at RT0, RT0 The same applies if Replay GR15 or 16 is won Going on. For this reason, even if the stop order for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained by navigation notification is specified, the stop order for winning the special replay that moves from the stop order to RT2 cannot be specified. Thus, it is possible to prevent the stop order to be shifted to RT2 from being specified when the stop order for maintaining RT0 is notified.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the replays GR11 and 12 are won at RT0, the stop order for winning the middle stage replay where RT0 is maintained is the same, but when the replay GR11 is won and the replay GR12 is Not only does the stop order for winning the special replay to shift to RT2 in the case of winning, but also the stop order for winning the special replay does not match, the fall replay wins and is more disadvantageous for the player than RT0 The same applies to the case where the replay GRs 13 and 14 are won at RT0 and the case where the replay GRs 15 and 16 are won at RT0. For this reason, even if the stop order for winning the special replay is narrowed down by specifying the stop order for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained by the navigation notification, the stop operation is performed other than the notified stop order. As a result, there may be a disadvantage for the player, so that the player can be prompted to stop in the notified stop order.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop order is applied as an operation mode for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained when winning the replays GR11 to 16 and an operation mode for winning the special replay to shift to RT2. The timing of the stop operation may be applied, or a combination of the stop order and the timing of the stop operation may be applied.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained when winning the replays GR11 to 16 and the special replay for shifting to RT2 In addition, although the fall replay wins and shifts to RT1, which is disadvantageous for the player than RT0, the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained when the replays GR11 to 16 are elected, special shift to RT2 When a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode for winning a replay, any display result other than the display result for which a special replay that moves to RT2 wins may be stopped. The display result to be stopped may be configured to stop.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the replay GRs 11 and 12 with the same operation mode for winning the middle stage replay are won, the operation mode for winning the special replay is the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay when the replay GRs 11 and 12 are won. Although it is the same as a part of the operation mode in which special replays are won in different replays GR13 to 16, the special replay is awarded in replays GR13 to 16 in which the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay is different from the winning of replays GR11 and 12. The configuration may be different from the operation mode. Further, when the replay GRs 13 and 14 having the same operation mode for winning the middle replay are won, the replays GR11 and 12 are different from the operation mode for winning the special replay and the operation mode for winning the middle replay when the replay GRs 13 and 14 are won. 15 and 16 are the same as part of the operation mode for winning a special replay, but the replay GRs 11, 12, 15, and 16 have different operation modes for winning a middle stage replay when the replays GR 13 and 14 are selected. The configuration may be different from the operation mode for winning a prize. In addition, when the replays GR15 and 16 having the same operation mode for winning the middle replay are won, the replays GR11 to 14 are different from the operation mode for winning the special replay in the case of winning the replay GR15 and 16 and the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay. Is the same as a part of the operation mode for winning a special replay, but is different from the operation mode for winning a special replay in the replays GR11 to 14 in which the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay is different from the time of winning the replays GR15 and 16. It may be.

  In addition, RT2 is advantageous to the player in that it is more likely to be given benefits advantageous to the player than RT0 in that the number of ART games is likely to be increased. However, for example, a configuration that is advantageous to the player in terms of a high probability of winning a specific combination, a high probability of winning a specific combination, and a high medal payout rate may be used.

  Here, the benefit advantageous to the player means a right that allows the player to shift to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (winning a lottery for determining whether or not to generate the advantageous state, shifting to the advantageous state. (E.g., winning is permitted), the right to be notified of an operation mode advantageous to the player, the right to be controlled to a gaming state with a high expected value to which a gaming value is given, and the current gaming state are advantageous to the player Such as the right to be notified of whether or not the player is in a gaming state, the period during which the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state (the number of fixed games, the average value of the number of games that vary depending on the end condition, etc.) Alternatively, it may be a benefit that is indirectly advantageous to the player, such as a condition for obtaining a privilege on the Internet, although it is not directly advantageous to the player.

  In this embodiment, in RT0, the display results for maintaining RT0, the display results for transitioning to RT2, and the display results for transitioning to RT1 are all applied the display results for the re-game player to win. The display result may be a display result in which a small combination wins, or a display result in which no combination wins.

  Next, the control content of the internal winning command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In this embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery subject, and a lottery subject that may be carried over, that is, a special winning number table in which a winning number for each type of special role is set, A lottery target that is not carried over, that is, a general winning number table in which a winning number for each type of general winning is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the special role winning number table, when no special role is won, that is, the winning winning number is “0”, the winning number of BB is “1”, The winning number is assigned “1”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in the general combination winning number table, “0” is set as the winning number when none of the general winning combinations is won, that is, in the case of losing, and the winning number of the normal replay is “1”. "Is the winning number for replay GR1," 2 "is the winning number for replay GR2," 3 "is the winning number for replay GR3, and" 5 "is the winning number for replay GR4. The winning number of the replay GR5 is “6”, the winning number of the replay GR6 is “7”, the winning number of the replay GR11 is “8”, and the winning number of the replay GR12 is “9”. The winning number for GR13 is "10", the winning number for replay GR14 is "11", the winning number for replay GR15 is "12", and the winning number for replay GR16 is "13", which is replay GR21. The winning number is “14”, the winning number of the replay GR 22 is “15”, the winning number of the replay GR 23 is “16”, the winning number of the replay GR 24 is “17”, the winning number of the replay GR 25 “18” is assigned, and “19” is assigned as the winning number of the replay GR 26. In addition, “20” is assigned to the winning number of the strong cherry, “21” is assigned to the winning number of the weak cherry, and “22” is assigned to the winning number of the watermelon. The winning number for left bell 1 is “23”, the winning number for left bell 2 is “24”, the winning number for left bell 3 is “25”, and the winning number for left bell 4 is “ “26” is the winning number of the middle bell 1, “27” is the winning number of the middle bell 2, “28” is the winning number of the middle bell 3, “29” is the winning number of the middle bell 4 , “30” is the winning number for right bell 1, “31” is the winning number for right bell 2, “32” is the winning number for right bell 3, “33” is the winning number for right bell 4 “34” is assigned as the number, and “35” is assigned as the winning number of the common bell.

  As described above, in the special combination winning number table and the general combination winning number table, the lottery subject for internal lottery and the winning number are set correspondingly.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes an internal lottery process when a start operation is performed, and when any of the special combination and the general combination is won in the internal lottery The winning number corresponding to the lottery subject for which the winning is determined is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if no winning combination is won, the winning number corresponding to the loss is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared at the end of one game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the selected special role is won by winning Cleared.

  After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes an internal winning command setting process, and based on the internal winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the timer interruption process (main) thereafter.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, in the internal winning command setting process, first, the winning number of the special role set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sf1), and the acquired winning number is displayed. The transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of 2 bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command content). When storing the first internal winning command in the command queue, 41 stores MODE indicating that the first internal winning command is in the first byte, and winning for sending the special role in the second byte EXT. Stores the number.

  In the step of Sf3, after storing the first internal winning command, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sf4), and the acquired winning number is less than 2. It is determined whether there is (Sf5), less than 20 (Sf6), less than 23 (Sf7), and less than 35 (Sf8). It is determined which of a plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in a predetermined range.

  If it is determined in step Sf5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, if the winning number is 0 or 1, the acquired winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). If it is determined in step Sf5 that the winning number is not less than 2 and it is determined in step Sf6 that it is less than 20, that is, if the winning number is one of 2 to 19, 2 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). When it is determined that the winning number is not less than 20 in step Sf6 and is less than 23 in step Sf7, that is, when the winning number is any of 20 to 22, the winning number is The winning number for transmission is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). If it is determined in step Sf7 that the winning number is not less than 23 and it is determined in step Sf8 that it is less than 35, that is, if the winning number is any of 23 to 34, the winning number for transmission is used. 23 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). If it is determined in step Sf8 that the winning number is not less than 35, that is, if the winning number is 35, the winning number is set as a transmission winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9).

  Then, after setting the general winning transmission winning number in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the steps Sf9, Sf10, and Sf11, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmitting winning number. When storing the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating that it is the second internal winning command in the first byte, and plays a general role in the second byte of EXT. Stores the winning number for transmission.

  After the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue in step Sf10, the internal winning command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

  Thus, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the special role set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the winning number for transmission, and the first including the winning number for transmission is included. Set the internal winning command in the command queue.

  Further, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is within the first predetermined range (0 to 20, 20 to 22, 35). In this case, the winning number is set as the transmission winning number, and the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. Thereby, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the first predetermined range (0 to 20, 20 to 22, 35) is set in the internal winning, The winning number by internal lottery can be specified based on the winning number for transmission included.

  On the other hand, when the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 19), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the transmitting winning number, and the transmitting winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is set in the command queue. Thereby, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the second predetermined range (2 to 19) is set in the internal winning, the winning number for transmission included in the command is transmitted. On the other hand, it is not possible to specify whether the winning number is in the second predetermined range (2-19), while the winning number is in the second predetermined range (2-19) It is possible to identify a certain thing.

  Further, when the winning number is within the third predetermined range (23 to 34), one winning number (23) included in the third predetermined range is set as the transmitting winning number, and the transmitting winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is set in the command queue. Thereby, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the third predetermined range (23 to 34) is set in the internal winning, the winning number for transmission included in the command is transmitted. On the other hand, it is impossible to specify which of the numbers in the third predetermined range (23 to 34) the winning number is, while the winning number is in the third predetermined range (23 to 34). It is possible to identify a certain thing.

  The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment are then executed by the timer interrupt process (main), so that the sub-control unit 91 Are sequentially transmitted.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to transmit a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub-control unit 91. However, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data A form may be used. In this embodiment, the command is composed of a 2-byte signal, but these commands may be composed of a 1-byte signal or a 3-byte or more signal.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to transmit a first internal winning command and a second internal winning command composed of 2 bytes to the sub-control unit 91. Although the configuration includes a winning number for transmission in the byte, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, the first internal winning command, the second internal winning command Each winning command is composed of a 3-byte signal, and the configuration in which the winning number for sending a special role or the winning number for sending a general role is included in the third byte, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. It may be configured by one signal composed of 3 bytes, and a transmission number for special role transmission may be included in the second byte, and a transmission number for general role transmission may be included in the third byte.

  In the present embodiment, the winning numbers of the special roles corresponding to the types and losing of the special roles (BB, RB) in the special role winning number table are divided and assigned separately. The general control winning number is set in the general winning number table, and the winning number of the general winning is set according to the type and deviation of the general winning. The main control unit 41 determines the winning number of the special winning and the general according to the result of the internal lottery. The winning number of the winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, but the winning number is assigned without being divided into the special winning role and the general winning role, for example, “BB”, “small role”, “BB + winning simultaneously. A configuration may be adopted in which a winning number (for example, BB + strong cherry or the like shown in FIG. 23) is assigned as a single lottery target role. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special combination and the small combination are selected based only on the one winning number. It is possible to perform predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc.).

  Next, the control content of the push order command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32, 34 and 35. FIG.

  In the present embodiment, navigation numbers (0 to 9) that can identify the stop order of reels by navigation notification are assigned in advance, and among the lottery target combinations, the notification target combination is assigned a navigation number for each type. A navigation number table in which navigation numbers for each type of lottery object combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 34, as the navigation number, 0 indicating the standard pushing order (in this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop), the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop, that is, the left first 1 indicating 1 stop, stop order in which the middle reel 2C is the first stop, ie, 2 indicating middle first stop, stop order in which the right reel 2R is the first stop, ie 3, indicating right first stop, and first stop The left reel 2L, the second stop is the middle reel 2C, the third stop is the right reel 2R, and the stop order is 4, the first stop is the left reel 2L, the second stop is the right reel 2R, and the third stop is the middle reel 2C. 5 indicates a stop order, 6 indicates a stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the left reel 2L, and the third stop is the right reel 2R, and the first stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop. 7 indicates the stop order, with the right reel 2R and the third stop the left reel 2L. Stop is right reel 2L, second stop is left reel 2L, third stop is middle reel 2C, 8 indicates the stop order, first stop is right reel 2R, second stop is middle reel 2C, and third stop is left 9 indicating the stop order for the reel 2L is set.

  In this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is stopped first is applied as the standard push order specified by the navigation number 0. However, the standard push order is disadvantageously advantageous for the player. As long as they are in a standard push order, other stop orders may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the navigation number table, a navigation number is set for each type of notification target combination among lottery target combinations, and for left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, and left bell 4. "1" is for the middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, and middle bell 4, and "2" is "3" for the right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, and right bell 4. "Is set for replay GR1," 5 "for replay GR2," 6 "for replay GR3," 7 "for replay GR4, and replay GR5 “8” is set to “9” for the replay GR6.

  In addition, for replay GR11-16, a navigation number is set according to the winning situation of the above-described extra lottery. When the extra lottery is not won, navigation number 1 is set for replay GR11 and replay GR12. For replay GR13 and replay GR14, navigation number 2 is set, for replay GR15 and replay GR16, navigation number 3 is set, and when the addition lottery is won, navigation number is set for replay GR11 and replay GR16. 2 is set for the replay GR12 and the replay GR13, and the navigation number 1 is set for the replay GR14 and the replay GR15. Further, navigation numbers 1 and 2 are set for replay GR21 and replay GR24, navigation numbers 1 and 3 are set for replay GR22 and replay GR25, and navigation numbers 2 and 3 are set for replay GR23 and replay GR26. .

  Note that no navigation number is set for the normal replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, and common bell that are not notified among the lottery winning combinations.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 wins the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the start operation is performed and when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. A push order command setting process for setting a push order command corresponding to the number in the command queue is executed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the push order command setting process, first, after acquiring the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process (Sg1), the predetermined area of the RAM 41c Whether or not the navigation notification is performed (when the navigation notification is performed during AT or non-AT) with reference to a predetermined flag indicating whether the navigation notification is set or not Is determined (Sg2). If it is determined in step Sg2 that the navigation notification is not performed, whether or not the winning combination to be stopped on the winning line LN is confirmed based on the stop status of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the result of the internal lottery. (Sg5), and if the winning combination is not confirmed in the winning line LN, the standard navigation number (0 in this embodiment) is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sg6).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the navigation notification is in the state at step Sg2, or when it is determined at step Sg5 that the winning combination to be stopped on the winning line LN is determined, it is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. With reference to the navigation number table (see FIG. 32), the navigation number corresponding to the winning number of the general combination acquired in step Sg1 is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, if it is specified that the replays GR1 to GR6 are winning based on the internal winning numbers, the stop order in which the combination of the promotion replays is stopped on the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. The navigation number shown is set as the transmission navigation number. In addition, when it is specified that the replays GR11 to 16 are won and it is specified that the winning lottery is not selected, the combination of the middle replays is selected in the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. A navigation number indicating the stop order to be stopped is set as a transmission navigation number. Further, when it is specified that the replays GR11 to 16 are winning and it is specified that the winning lottery is selected, the combination of special replays is selected in the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. A navigation number indicating the stop order to be stopped is set as a transmission navigation number.

  In addition, when it is specified that the replays GR21 to 26 are elected, one of red 7-match replay, red 7 miss-replay, blue 7-match replay, and blue 7 miss-replay depending on the type of the winning role The navigation number indicating the stop order in which the combination of the above can be stopped on the winning line LN is set as the transmission navigation number. In the present embodiment, in the navigation number table, two navigation numbers corresponding to the replays GR21 to 26 are set, but the main control unit 41 selects either one selected by lottery. The navigation number is set as the transmission navigation number.

  In addition, when it is specified that the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 are elected based on the internal winning numbers, the middle bell A navigation number indicating a stop order in which the combination is stopped on the winning line LN is set as a transmission navigation number.

  After the transmission navigation number is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Sg3 or Sg6, the push order command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission navigation number (Sg4). When storing the push order command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating the push order command in the first byte, and stores the transmission navigation number in EXT of the second byte.

  After the push order command is stored in the command queue in step Sg4, the push order command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

  Thus, when the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process, which is advantageous for the player when the navigation notification is being executed. If a command for pressing the order that can specify the stop order is set in the command queue and the navigation notification is not being executed, it is impossible to specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player, and this is a standard that is disadvantageous and advantageous for the player. A command for specifying the order of pressing is set in the command queue.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs a push order command setting process every time a stop operation is performed, so that even when the navigation notification is not being executed, the main control unit 41 stops at the winning line LN. Is determined, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is set in the command queue.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is a case where, for example, the replay GR1 is won in a state where the gaming state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed by executing the push order command setting process. When none of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the promotion replay and the middle stage replay can be stopped, but it is not determined which combination will be stopped, so the standard navigation number (“0”) Is set as the transmission navigation number, and a push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. In addition, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, the promotion replay and the middle replay can still be stopped, and it is not determined which combination will stop, so the standard navigation number ("" 0 ") is set. When the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, only the promoted replay can be stopped by the subsequent stop of the right reel 2R, and the combination to stop is confirmed. Therefore, even when navigation notification is not performed, a navigation number ("4") that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player (stop order for winning the promotion replay) is the transmission navigation number. Is set. When a reel other than the left reel 2L is stopped in the first stop, after the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, and when a reel other than the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, the subsequent stop Regardless of the order, only the middle stage replay can be stopped, and the combination to be stopped is fixed. Therefore, even when navigation notification is not performed, a navigation number (“ 4 ") is set as the transmission navigation number.

  In addition, when the game state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed and the replays GR2 to 6 are elected, as in the case where the replay GR1 is elected, any role of promotion replay or middle stage replay is played. When it is not determined whether to stop, a push order command including a standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and it is advantageous for the player when it is determined which role of promotion replay or middle replay stops. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify a specific stop order is set.

  In addition, for example, when the game state is RT0, no navigation notification is performed, and the replay GR11 is won, and when none of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the middle stage replay, special replay, Although the fall replay can be stopped, it is not determined which combination will be stopped, so the standard navigation number ("0") that cannot specify the stop order of the replay GR11 is set as the transmission navigation number. The push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, only the middle stage replay can be stopped, and the combination to stop is fixed. Therefore, even if the navigation notification is not performed, the stop advantageous to the player A navigation number (“2”) that can specify the order (stop order in which special replays are won) is set as the transmission navigation number. In addition, when the middle reel 2C is stopped as the first stop, it is determined that only the special replay is stopped. Therefore, a navigation number ("2") that can specify a stop order advantageous for the player is used for transmission. When the right reel 2R is stopped as the first stop and the right reel 2R is stopped, it is determined that only the fall replay is stopped. Therefore, a navigation number ("2") that can specify a stop order advantageous for the player. ) Is set as the transmission navigation number.

  In addition, when the game state is RT0 and navigation notification is not performed and the replay GR12 to 16 is won, any of the middle stage replay, special replay, and fall fall replay is performed in the same manner as when the replay GR11 is won. When it is not determined whether the combination will stop, a push order command including the standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and it is determined which combination of middle replay, special replay, and fall replay will stop In addition, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player (stop order in which a special replay is won) is set.

  Also, when the replay GR 21-26 is won in a state where the game state is RT2 and no navigation notification is performed, the red 7-match replay and red 7 are missed in the same manner as when the replay GR 1-6 is won. When it is not certain which one of the replay, blue 7 complete replay, blue 7 missed replay, and promoted replay will stop, a push order command including a standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and which role When it is determined whether to stop, it is possible to specify a stop order (stop order in which red 7 complete replay, red 7 missing replay, blue 7 complete replay, blue 7 missing replay are awarded) that is advantageous to the player. Push order commands including are set.

  Further, when the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4 are won in a state where navigation notification is not performed, the same as when the replay GR 1 to 6 or the replay GR 21 to 26 is won. Thus, when it is not certain which combination of the middle bell and the upper bell 1 to 8 is to be stopped, a push order command including the standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and which combination is to be stopped. Is determined, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player (stop order for winning the middle bell) is set.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 does not control the AT, and when the notification target role is won, the main control unit 41 determines the stop order that is advantageous to the player at the timing determined for the player. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify an advantageous stop order is set and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The timing at which an advantageous stop order is determined is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed in the three-choice roles (replay GRs 11 to 16 and replay GRs 21 to 26 of the push-order replays), and the six-choice roles ( In the replays GR1 to GR6), it is the timing when the first stop operation is performed and it is determined that the winning combination advantageous to the player is not stopped, or the second stop operation is performed.

  The push order commands set in the push order command setting process of this embodiment are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt process (main) thereafter.

  When the sub control unit 91 specifies that the navigation notification is being performed on the main control unit 41 side based on the push order command, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command described above. In addition, a navigation effect is performed. When the sub control unit 91 performs the navigation effect, the winning of the notification target role is specified based on the second internal winning command, and the navigation number is other than “0” based on the push order command. That is, when it is specified that the pressing order advantageous to the player is other than the standard pressing order, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a stop order image indicating the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the pressing order command. To display. In the navigation effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image that suggests a role that may be won based on the second internal winning command. At this time, for example, when the push order bell is elected as the notification target role, by displaying the image of “bell”, it is possible to win the push order bell, and the push order replay is won. If there is, the type of replay GR that may be won is identified based on the gaming state (RT0 to RT3) on the main control unit 41 side identified based on the gaming state command or the like, and the identified replay By performing effects according to the roles included in the GR (for example, promotion replay in replay GR1-6, special replay in replay GR11-16, red 7 replay or blue 7 replay in replay GR21-26) It is possible to suggest the possibility of winning a role that is advantageous to the player.

  Further, as an effect according to the combination included in the replay GR in the navigation effect, for example, even when the replay GRs 21 to 26 are won in the internal lottery, in the internal winning command transmission process on the main control unit 41 side, “2” indicating the winning of any one of the replays GR 1 to 6, 11 to 16, and 21 to 26 is uniformly set as the winning number for sending the winning command. Replay GRs 21 to 26 are selected by the fact that the winning number for transmission is “2” based on the internal winning command and that the gaming state is RT2 based on the gaming state command or the like. Together with an image showing the stop order corresponding to the navigation number specified based on the push order command and red 7 replay or Included in the replays GR21 to 26 by displaying an image that suggests the possibility of winning the blue 7 replay (in this embodiment, an image that prompts a stop operation at the timing when red 7 and blue 7 are aimed at each reel) It is possible to perform an effect according to a combination that is advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, a combination having a high average number of games won in the ART game number lottery).

  Next, the control content of the winning determination command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In this embodiment, a winning number (0 to 65) is assigned in advance for each type of winning combination for the special combination and the general combination, and a winning number table in which a winning number is set for each type of winning combination is a predetermined number in the ROM 41b. Stored in the area.

  As shown in FIG. 18, a winning number is assigned for each type of winning combination, that is, for each combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN, and “Replay a-Cherry a-Cherry a” in the upper bell 1 is “ “1” is “Replay a-Cherry a-White 7”, “2” is “Replay a-Cherry a-BAR”, “3” is “Replay a-Cherry b-Cherry a” “4”, “Replay a-Cherry b-White 7” is assigned “5”, “Replay a-Cherry b-BAR” is assigned “6”, and “Replay a-Cherry a- “Plum” is assigned “7”, “Replay a-Cherry b-Plum” is assigned “8”, “Replay a-Plum-Cherry a” of the upper bell 3 is assigned “9”, “Replay a -"Plum-White 7", "10" is "Replay a “Plum-BAR” is assigned “11”, “Replay a-Plum-Plum” in the upper bell 4 is assigned “12”, and “Replay b-Cherry a-Cherry a” in the upper bell 5 is “13” is “Replay b-Cherry a-White 7”, “14” is “Replay b-Cherry a-BAR”, “15” is “Replay b-Cherry b-Cherry a” “16” is assigned to “Replay b-Cherry b—White 7”, “17” is assigned to “Replay b-Cherry b-BAR”, and “18” is assigned. “-Plum” is assigned “19”, “Replay b-Cherry b-Plum” is assigned “20”, “Replay b-Plum-Cherry a” of the upper bell 7 is assigned “21”, “Replay” b-Plum-White 7 ”is“ 2 "Is," replay b- plum -BAR "is," 23 "is assigned," replay a- plum of the upper bell 8 - plum "is," 24 "has been assigned.

  The middle bell “Bell-Bell-Bell” is assigned “25”, and the right-down bell “Replay a-Bell-Red 7” is “26” and “Replay a-Bell-Replay a”. “27”, “Replay b-bell-red 7” are assigned “28”, and “Replay b-bell-replay a” are assigned “29”.

  In addition, “30” is assigned to “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” of the middle stage watermelon, and “31” is assigned to “bell-watermelon-cherry b” of the right-down watermelon. In addition, “Red 7-Bell-Bell” of Corner Cherry 1 is assigned “32”, and “33” is assigned to “BAR-Bell-Bell”. “34” is assigned to “a”, and “35” is assigned to “BAR-Bell-Replay a”.

  As shown in FIG. 19, “Replay a-Replay a-Replay a” in the middle replay is assigned “36”, and “Replay b-Replay a-Replay a” is assigned “37”. “Bell-Replay a-Red 7” is assigned “38”, “Belle-Replay a-Bell” is assigned “39”, and “Bell-Replay a-Replay a” is “40” for the promoted replay. , "Bell-Red 7-Cherry a" in the fall replay is "41", "Bell-Red 7-Watermelon" is "42", "Bell-Red 7-Plum" is "43" “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry a” is “44”, “Bell-Watermelon-Watermelon” is “45”, “Bell-Watermelon-Plum” is “46”, “Bell-Cherry” “a-Cherry a” is “47” but “Bell-Cherry a- “48” is assigned to “squid”, “49” is assigned to “bell-cherry a-plum”, and “50” is assigned to “replay b-replay” for “replay a-replay a-bell”. “a-bell” is assigned “51”.

  In addition, “52” is assigned to “Replay b-Blue 7-Replay a” for red 7-match replay, and “53” is assigned to “Replay a-Blue 7-Replay a” for red 7 missing replay. “a-watermelon-replay a” is “54”, “replay a-cherry a-replay a” is “55”, “replay b-watermelon-replay a” is “56”, “replay b” -"Cherry a-Replay a" is assigned "57", "Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay a" with blue 7 matching replay is assigned "58", and "Cherry a-watermelon" with blue 7 missed replay -"Replay a" is "59", "Cherry a-Cherry a-Replay a" is "60", "Bell-Blue 7-Replay a" is "61", "Bell-Watermelon-Replay" “a” is “62” "Bell - Cherry a- replay a", "63" is assigned.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, BB “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7” is assigned “64”, and RB “Blue 7-Red 7-Red 7” is assigned “65”. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 responds to the combination of symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped after the start operation is performed. A winning determination process for determining whether or not a winning has occurred is executed. In the winning determination process, for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination on the winning line LN is stopped, and the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped. If it is determined, the winning number table is referred to, and the winning number corresponding to the combination of symbols constituting the stopped winning combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, while the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination is set. Is determined not to stop, “0” indicating a loss is set as a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the winning determination process is terminated.

  Then, after executing the winning determination process, the main control unit 41 executes a winning determination command setting process for setting a winning determination command capable of specifying the winning number in the command queue.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the winning determination command setting process, a winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired based on the winning determination result in the winning determination process (Sh1), and the winning determination command is based on the winning number. Is stored in the command queue (Sh2), and the winning determination command setting process is terminated. When storing the winning determination command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating the winning determination command in the first byte, and stores the winning number in EXT of the second byte.

  The winning determination command set in the winning determination command setting process is then sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interruption process (main).

  As described above, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the winning determination command setting process, sets the winning determination command including the winning number, A winning determination command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  In the winning determination command setting process of the present embodiment, a winning determination command including the winning number set in the RAM 41c in the winning determination process is set in the command queue, so that a special command or the like that can specify the winning number is used. The processing load can be reduced without performing the conversion process.

  In the present embodiment, since a winning number is assigned for each type of winning combination and stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the winning determination command including the winning number is based on the winning number. Thus, it is possible to specify a combination of symbols stopped on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and execute an effect.

  A conventional slot machine has a configuration including a game control unit that controls a game and an effect control unit that controls an effect. The game control unit displays an internal lottery result when a predetermined notification target role is won. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not to control to the AT in which the navigation notification for notifying the operation procedure of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is executed. Regardless of whether or not the AT is controlled by the AT, the internal winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit, and the effect control unit specifies the internal lottery result based on the internal winning command and controls the game. In the case where the AT is controlled by the AT, the navigation effect is generated to notify the operation procedure advantageous to the player based on the specified internal lottery result.

  In such a configuration, the effect control unit can identify an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player based on the internal winning command regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. In this way, although the game control unit has not decided to control the AT, an operation procedure advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is identified from the internal winning command, and the operation procedure is There is a possibility of being notified by the production control unit.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the first internal winning command and the general combination that can specify the winning situation of the special role as the internal lottery result as the internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A second internal winning command that can identify the winning status is set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, it is controlled by the AT. Regardless of whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but in general, it is not possible to specify a stop order advantageous to the player Since the second internal winning command related to the combination is set, the second internal winning command changes to the internal lottery result regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. A common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT without specifying an advantageous stopping order for the next player, so that the second internal winning command can be transmitted. This process can be simplified, and even if fraud is made on the side of the sub-control unit 91, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being notified by the navigation effect without being controlled by the AT.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to notify the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, which is advantageous for the player, by navigation notification according to the notification target combination won by internal winning. The control unit 41 provides an operation mode operated at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode operated in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation mode based on a combination thereof by navigation notification. Even in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 specifies that the notification target role has been won regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Although the second internal winning command is set on the sub-control unit 91 side by setting the second internal winning command so that an operation mode advantageous to the player cannot be specified. Advantageous operation mode is not be identified for the player in accordance with the internal lottery result from de.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 performs internal lottery in the internal winning command setting process. When the result becomes a notification target combination, a second internal winning command is set so that it can be specified whether the notification target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell. Therefore, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination, it is possible to specify whether the notification target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell on the sub-control unit 91 side. It is also possible to perform different presentations depending on the type of notification target combination.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls to the AT, and in the state where the navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, the stop order advantageous for the player is specified. A push order command setting process for setting a push order command that can be performed is executed and the set push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the player on the side of the sub-control unit 91 in the state where the navigation notification is executed is performed. It is possible to perform a navigation effect that informs of an advantageous stop order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification in the push order command setting process. When the internal lottery result becomes the push order replay in the state of being played, and when the push order bell is reached, that is, in the state where the navigation notification is executed, the notification target roles won in the internal lottery are different types. However, when the stop order advantageous for the player is common, the push order command including the common navigation number that can specify the stop order advantageous for the player is set, so the types of push order commands can be reduced. it can.

  Further, in the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment specifies a stop order that is advantageous for the player when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role in a state in which navigation notification is executed. While a push order command including a navigation number that can be set is set, in a state other than a state where navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, it is not possible to specify a stop order advantageous to the player Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the standard push order (first left stop) is set, the result of the internal lottery becomes the notification target regardless of whether or not the navigation notification is executed. Sometimes, a process for setting a push order command including a navigation number can be shared.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R step by step every time the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. The order is determined before the operation of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, that is, the third stop operation is completed. For example, when the push order bell is won, the first stop operation is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not the middle bell can be won, and when the replays GR11 to 16 are selected, the first stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the special replay can be won, and the replay When GR21-26 is elected, the first stop operation will be performed, so red 7-match replay, red 7 miss replay, blue 7 match replay, blue 7 miss replay will be awarded It is determined whether or not the replay GR 1 to 6 is won, and the second stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the promoted replay is awarded. The main control unit 41 In the push order command setting process, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, a stage in which a stop order advantageous to the player is determined, that is, the first stop, the second stop After the stop operation is performed, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify an advantageous stop order for the player according to the internal winning result is set and transmitted, so that the sub-control unit 91 is illegally operated. In this case, the sub-control unit 91 is operated in the stop order advantageous for the player when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role while preventing the stop order advantageous for the player from being specified. It is possible to perform the effect corresponding to whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the notification target combination is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed in the push order command setting process. Is set, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous for the player is set, and the push order command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. However, a command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player after the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed and the stop combination is determined is different from the push order command. For example, it is advantageous for the player based on the type of the winning notification target role by sending another command including the winning number of the notification target role won in the internal lottery. It may be configured to allow identifying stop order, separately may be configured to provide a command containing identifiable navigation ID favorable stop order for the player. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process only when the internal lottery is performed, and then, when the winning combination to be stopped is determined, the stop order advantageous to the player. By setting the process for setting a command that can specify the command, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to execute the push order command setting process when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is performed, After the winning combination to be stopped is determined, every time the pressing order command setting process is performed, a pressing order command capable of specifying a stopping order advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The push order command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player after the winning combination is determined may be transmitted at least once when the winning combination is determined. The configuration may be such that the push order command setting process is not executed after the push order command that can specify the stop order advantageous to the user is transmitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a load related to transmission of a push order command by the main control unit 41.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a push order command setting process when an internal lottery is performed and a stop operation is performed on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in a state in which navigation notification is performed. However, when the navigation notification is in the state, the push order command setting process may be executed only when the internal lottery is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a load related to transmission of a push order command by the main control unit 41 in a state where navigation notification is performed.

  When the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs an internal lottery, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the winning number set. The internal winning flag is set, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc. are performed, and the winning status of the special role is determined as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A first internal winning command that can be specified and a second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of the general role are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The winning number when the notification target combination is won as an internal winning result is a predetermined numerical range (the winning number of the push order replay as the notification target combination is 2 to 2). 9 and the winning number of the push order bell is 23 to 34.) is assigned, and the internal winning command setting process is controlled by the AT and the navigation notification is executed. In a state other than the above, when the winning number set in the RAM 41c is within the predetermined numerical range (2 to 19, 23 to 34), it is possible to specify that it has been notified, but it is advantageous for the player. Since the second internal winning command whose order cannot be specified is set and the set second internal winning command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, it is determined whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Regardless, since the stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is not specified from the second internal winning command, the AT is controlled by the AT even if a fraud is made on the sub-control unit 91 side. Advantageous stop order for the player can be prevented from being informed by the navigation performance with no state.

  In addition, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 indicates that the internal lottery result is the notification target combination. Whether or not the winning number used in performing the predetermined control is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination, and therefore the second internal winning command is transmitted. Can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay, In other words, the internal lottery results are assigned consecutive numbers in the first numerical range (2 to 19) as the winning numbers of the lottery target roles of replay GR1-6, replay GR11-16, and replay GR21-26, and the internal lottery result As the winning numbers when と な becomes the push order bell, that is, the internal lottery results are the winning numbers of the lottery target roles of the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4, the second numerical range ( 23-34) are assigned consecutive numbers, the main control unit 41 determines whether the winning number is in the first numerical range or the second numerical value when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination. Is a range Depending on whether a push order replay internal lottery result, since it is possible to determine whether the push order bell, can be simplified processing for setting the second internal winning command in internal winning command setting process.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a first state (RT0, RT1, RT2) and a second state (for example, RT1 or RT2 as the first state, RT1 as the first state, It is possible to control to a plurality of gaming states (RT0 to 4, RB) including RT0 or RT2 for RT1 and RT0 or RT1 for RT2 as the first state. The types of push order replays as notification target combinations determined in the internal lottery are different (in this embodiment, for example, in RT0, replays GR11 to 16 are the lottery target combinations, while replays GR1 to 6 and replays GR21 to 21). 26 is not a lottery target, and in RT1, replays GR1 to GR6 are lottery targets, while replay GR11 to 16 and replay GRs 21 to 26 are not lottery targets. In RT2, the replay GRs 21 to 26 are the lottery target roles, while the replay GR1 to 6 and the replay GRs 11 to 16 are not the lottery target roles, but are the notification target roles that are the targets of the internal winning in the gaming state RT0-2. The type is different), and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay when the gaming state is the first state, and the internal lottery result is the push order replay when the gaming state is the second state. Since the winning numbers at the time are all assigned to the first numerical range (2 to 19), the internal lottery results are pushed in both the first state and the second state in the internal winning command setting process. A process for determining whether or not the replay is performed can be shared.

  Further, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment responds to the internal lottery result when the internal lottery result is a role other than the notification target role or in a state where it is not controlled by the AT. When the second internal winning command including the winning numbers (0 to 20, 20 to 22 and 35 in the present embodiment) is set and the internal lottery result is the push order replay which is the notification target combination, When one winning number (2 in the present embodiment) included in the numerical range (2 to 19) is included and the internal lottery result is a push order bell that is a notification target role, the second numerical range (23 to 34) ), A second internal winning command including one winning number (23 in the present embodiment) is included, so that the internal lottery result is a notification target role in a state where it is not controlled by the AT. Is also subject to notification Since the second internal winning command including the winning number corresponding to the internal lottery result is transmitted even if the internal lottery is out of or no, the second internal winning regardless of whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target role Processing to create and send commands can be shared.

  In the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment determines whether the notification target combination is used when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. Although it is possible to specify that it has been won, it is configured to set the second internal winning command related to the general role so that it is not possible to specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player, but when it is not controlled by the AT When the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination, the fact that the notification target combination has been won can be specified, but the second internal winning related to the general combination so that the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified While the command is set and the state is controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the winning number corresponding to the type of the notified notification target combination, for example, the push order When the replay GR 11 is won as a ray, the winning number is “8”. When the middle bell 1 is won as a push order bell, the second internal winning command including the winning number “27” is set to control the AT. In this state, the second internal winning command that can identify the type of the notified role to be notified may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, it is possible to specify a stop order advantageous for the player according to the type of the role to be notified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. The control unit 91 can notify the stop order advantageous for the player by the navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the winning number of the lottery subject in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. For example, when the replay GR 21 is won, an effect suggesting the possibility that the red 7 replay included in the replay GR 21 is won can be performed.

  Further, in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured not to execute the push order command setting process and transmit the push order command, and is controlled by the AT by adopting such a configuration. In the state, from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, it is possible to specify the stop order advantageous for the player according to the type of the role to be notified, and the sub-control unit 91 side sets the stop order advantageous for the player. While being able to notify by a navigation effect, the load concerning transmission of the push order command by the main control part 41 can be reduced.

  The winning number for the push order replay and the winning number for the push order bell need only be set in a continuous numerical range, and the first numerical range in which the winning number for the push order replay is set and the push order. The second numerical value range in which the winning number of the bell is set may be continuous. Even in such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target combination, and the winning number used when performing predetermined control is the notification target combination. Since the determination can be made based on whether or not the value is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the process, the process for transmitting the second internal winning command can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, 1 to 35 are assigned as the winning numbers for the general combination, and the winning numbers for the push order replay that is the notification target combination are continuously set in the first numerical range (2 to 19). The winning number of the push order bell that is the notification target combination is continuously set in the second numerical range (23 to 34), and the winning numbers of the non-notifying target combination are the first numerical range and the second numerical range. However, it may be configured such that the winning numbers of all the non-notification target roles are continuously set in the third numerical value range. By adopting such a configuration, whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target combination is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the second internal winning command, and determine whether the winning number assigned to the non-notifying subject combination is within a predetermined numerical range. The processing to be performed can be simplified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, in the internal winning command transmission process, regardless of the gaming state, the same type of notification target role group (in this embodiment, push order replay group, push order bell For each group, the same winning number for transmission (in this embodiment, “2” for the push order replay group and “23” uniformly for the push order group) is set. The second internal winning command including the credit winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the internal winning command transmission process, the group of notification target roles to which the same winning number for transmission is set is at least Regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, it can be specified that the notification target role is won, but the stop order advantageous to the player is specified. For a group of the same type of notification target combination that is a lottery target in one gaming state, a plurality of combinations are included so that each group includes one advantageous role for the player. It is good also as a structure which divides | segments into a group and sets the different winning number for transmission for every divided group. As a result, it is possible to specify on the sub-control unit 91 side whether or not a notification target combination belonging to any one of a plurality of groups has been won, and to perform an effect corresponding to the specified group. As such a configuration, for example, with respect to the push order replay of the present embodiment, the replay GRs 21 to 26 which are the lottery targets in the gaming state RT2 are used for the player (in this embodiment, the red 7 replay and the blue 7 In order to include one replay), the first group (replay GR21 to 23) and the second group (replay GR24 to 26) are divided into different transmissions for the first group and the second group, respectively. By configuring the credit winning number (for example, 2A, 2B), the sub-control unit 91 receives the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number indicating the first group when the gaming state is RT2. While receiving, it becomes possible to identify that the first group has been won and execute an effect suggesting the possibility of red 7 replay winning Receiving the second internal winning command including the winning number for transmission indicating the second group, it is specified that the second group is winning, and the effect suggesting the possibility of winning the blue 7 replay In other words, it is possible to execute an effect that specifies a more advantageous role for the player.

  Next, an effect performed by the sub control unit 91 of the present embodiment using the display area 51a and the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The sub control unit 91 performs output control of effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55 based on various commands received from the main control unit 41 described above. It is possible to execute effects according to the game progress status and the control status of the main control unit 41. In particular, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment displays an image or the like on the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 according to the progress of the game, thereby superimposing the image or the like on the front surface of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The reel front effect that is displayed can be executed. Further, when the control state of the main control unit 41 is in an error state, an error notification effect that notifies the type of error can be executed, and when the front door 1b is in an open state, a door opening notification effect can be executed. When the main control unit 41 is in the setting change state, it is possible to execute an in-setting change notification effect that notifies that the setting change state is in progress, and when the main control unit 41 is in the standby state, it is in the standby state. It is possible to execute a standby effect indicating

  The reel front effect includes a front effect during game (see FIG. 37 (a)) executed in accordance with the progress of the game specified based on various received commands during a game period, and a non-game effect. In a certain period, it includes non-game front effects (FIGS. 37B and 37C) that are executed in accordance with game results and the like.

  In the present embodiment, during the game, for a game with a payout, that is, a game in which a small role is won, the start switch 7 is operated with the bet number set to a prescribed number in order to start the game. From the start of the game until the completion of the payout of medals accompanying the winning of the combination with the payout, that is, the replaying role without the payout, the game in which the special role is won, For games that did not win any of the roles, that is, the internal lottery result was lost or the internal winning combination could not be won, so-called missed games, the number of bets set to the prescribed number to start the game From when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started to when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped as the game progresses. A. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command and specifies that the game has started, and receives the winning determination command and determines that the winning combination with payout is specified, After that, when the payout end command is received, it is specified that the game has been ended, and when the winning determination command is received, it is determined that a winning combination without payout is won or a miss is specified. Then, it is determined that the game has been ended based on receiving the winning determination command. In this embodiment, the game is a period in which at least one reel is controlled to rotate in the reel rotation process, and the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is delayed after the start switch 7 is operated. This includes a period during which the operation is controlled to a freeze state during which the stop operation for stopping the reel is invalidated during the delay period, or after the reel starts rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the front effect during the game, the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R through which the winning line LN passes through the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image or the like. It is set as a prohibited display area, and an image or the like is displayed on the front surface of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by displaying an image or the like in the display area 51a and the transmissive area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 excluding the limited display area. There is an effect of displaying images and the like, and during the game, for example, by displaying an image of a predetermined character in an area other than the effect prohibited area, there is a possibility that the predetermined role has been won Etc. are suggested.

  As a result, during the game period, an image or the like is not displayed over the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R through which at least the winning line LN passes in the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, The visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the winning line LN is not lowered.

  Further, in the front effect during the game, the transmittance of an image or the like displayed in an area other than the effect prohibited area in the transmission area 51b is set in a range of 0% to 100%, and the image or the like is displayed. As a result, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back side of the image or the like is lowered from the normal visibility when the image or the like is not displayed, while the visibility of the image or the like is enhanced and the production is performed. To do.

  The transmittance at the time of displaying an image or the like in the transmissive region 51b is a transmittance based on the display of black having the lowest transmittance of the liquid crystal display 51 among the colors constituting the image, and the transmittance is 0. %, The light on the back side cannot pass and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not visible, but the contrast is the highest and the image is displayed clearly. Is possible. On the other hand, by increasing the transmittance, the visibility of the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is increased, but the contrast is lowered correspondingly and the sharpness of the image is lost.

  Also, in the front effect during the game, such as the number of credits displayed since the normal effect before executing the front effect during rotation, the number of games since the end of ART or RB, the number of payout medals, etc. The game history information related to the game history is displayed in the display area 51a.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c), in the non-game front effect, an effect prohibition region like the front effect during game is not set in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, and the winning line LN is not set. By displaying images and the like on all the transmissive areas 51b and the display areas 51a including areas corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that pass therethrough, the images and the like are superimposed on the front surface of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, an image of a symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed to notify that the winning combination has been won (FIG. 37 (b)), or an image indicating that the ART lottery has been won Is displayed to notify the AT that it is controlled (FIG. 37 (c)).

  In the front effect during non-game, the game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits is displayed in the display area 51a, and when there is a payout, the number of medals and the number of credits paid out according to the payout are displayed. Is supposed to be updated.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set with a range of transmittance of an image or the like to be displayed for each portion, and the winning line LN in the transmission area 51b is set. The transmittance range of the area corresponding to the design of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R through which the game passes (area D in FIG. 38 (a)) is 20% to 100%, and the reels 2L, 2C, The transmittance range of the region other than the region corresponding to the 2R symbol (region E in FIG. 38A) is 0% to 100%.

  The sub-control unit 91 controls to display an image or the like based on the image data recorded in advance in the CGROMs 99a to 99c when displaying the image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51. In the case where an image or the like is displayed in the region E in which the transmittance range is 0% to 100% in 51b, the image or the like is displayed in the region E using the image data without correction or the like. Thus, in the case where an image or the like is displayed in the region D in which the transmittance range is 20% to 100% in the transmissive region 51b, the image data such as the image to be displayed has data with a transmittance of less than 20%. Is included, correction such as adding a gradation value so as to increase the transmittance to 20% is performed, and the image or the like is displayed in the region D using the corrected image data.

  Thereby, in the area E other than the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the winning line LN passes in the transmission area 51b, the transmittance is 0%, that is, the rear reels 2L, 2C, and 2R cannot be visually recognized. While an image or the like is displayed in a manner that can include a portion, in the region D corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the winning line LN passes, the transmittance of the reel 2L on the back of the region D is set to at least 20%. An image or the like is displayed in a manner that does not include a portion so that 2C and 2R are not visually recognized.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 38B, in the game front effect and the non-game front effect, that is, the reel front effect, the display area 51a other than the transmission area 51b and the area E in which the above-described transmittance is 0% to 100%. For example, an image that is displayed as a whole (for example, image A in FIG. 38B) is displayed in such a manner that the transmittance is set to 0%, that is, the rear reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may include portions that cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, an image or the like (for example, the image B in FIG. 38B) that is integrally displayed over the transmissive region 51b including the region D having a transmittance of 20% to 100% has a transmittance of 20%. The transmittance is equal to or higher than the minimum transmittance of the region D, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back are displayed in such a manner that the rear reels 2L, 2C, and 2R cannot be visually recognized in any part of the integrally displayed image.

  Thus, when one image or the like to be displayed integrally in the transmissive region 51b is displayed over the region D having a transmittance of 20% to 100% and the region E having a transmittance of 0% to 100%, Since the entire transmittance of one image or the like is displayed on the transmissive region 51b in accordance with the transmittance of the region where the minimum value of the transmittance is high, the visual aspect of the image or the like changes at the boundary between the regions having different transmittances. Therefore, the visibility of the entire image can be integrated.

  Moreover, the sub-control unit 91 displays an image or the like corresponding to any of the winning line LN or the invalid lines LM1 to LM1 in the transmissive area 51b as a front effect during non-game, so that in the transmissive area 51b The first area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R stopped on the invalid lines LM1 to LM1 other than the winning line LN, and the reels 2L stopped on the winning line LN in the transmission area 51b, It is possible to produce an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the back side of the second region corresponding to the 2C, 2R symbols. In this effect, when one image or the like is displayed in the first area, if the first area includes an area on the winning line LN, the transmittance of the one image or the like is set to 20. %, The one image or the like is displayed in such a manner that the rear reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not visually recognized in any part of the first area, while the first area is the winning line LN When the upper region is not included, the transmittance of the one image or the like is set to 0%, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back surface in the first region cannot be visually recognized. Is displayed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39A, for example, when the character image G1 is displayed as one image or the like in correspondence with the invalid line LM1 parallel to the winning line LN in the transparent region 51b, By displaying the G1 transmittance as 0% while moving along the invalid line LM1, the first area corresponds to each symbol stopped on the invalid line LM1, that is, above the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The production is performed by changing the visibility of the area. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42B, for example, when the character image H1 is displayed as one image or the like corresponding to the invalid line LM3 intersecting with the winning line LN in the transparent region 51b, The H1 transmittance is set to 20% and displayed while being moved along the invalid line LM3, so that the first area is stopped on the invalid line LM3, that is, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, and the reel 2R. An effect is performed by changing the visibility of the area corresponding to the symbol so that the rear reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not visually recognized.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 has a first combination (for example, BB, RB, middle bell, middle watermelon, middle replay, etc.) in which a combination of specific symbols is arranged on the winning line LN as a non-game front effect. When a winning combination occurs, a second combination (for example, upper bell, right) in which a combination of specific symbols is arranged on any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 when a predetermined symbol combination is arranged on the winning line LN. Corresponding to the line in which the combination of the specific symbols is arranged in the transmission area 51b when a winning of a falling watermelon, corner cherry 1, 2, right-up replay, red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay, etc. occurs. By displaying an image or the like in the specific symbol area, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back side of the specific symbol area. In this effect, when an image or the like is displayed in the specific symbol area, if the specific symbol area includes an area corresponding to the symbol of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R stopped on the winning line LN, The transmissivity of all the images displayed in the specific symbol area is set to 20%, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back surface are displayed in such a manner that the rear reels 2L, 2C, and 2R cannot be visually recognized in any part of the specific symbol area. On the other hand, if the specific symbol area does not include an area corresponding to the symbol of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R stopped on the winning line LN, the transmittance of all images and the like to be displayed in the specific symbol area Is set to 0%, and the image or the like is displayed in such a manner that the rear reels 2L, 2C, and 2R cannot be visually recognized in the specific symbol area.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), when a BB that has “Blue 7” as a specific symbol on the winning line LN as a first combination wins, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), When a blue 7 uniform replay in which “blue 7” is arranged as a specific symbol on the invalid line LM4 as a combination of two wins, the specific symbol region, that is, “blue 7” of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in the transmission region 51b. Each of the reels stopped on the winning line LN is displayed by displaying a decorative image (in this embodiment, crown images J1 to J6) with a transmittance of 20% in each area corresponding to “blue 7”. The production is performed such that the rear reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not visually recognized in any part of the specific symbol area including the areas corresponding to the symbols of 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), when a red 7-matched replay in which “red 7” is arranged as a specific symbol on the invalid line LM2 as the second combination wins, it is specified in the transmission region 51b. A decorative image (in this embodiment, crown images K1 to K3) adorning “red 7” in the design region, that is, each region corresponding to “red 7” of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is set to 0% transmittance. By displaying the effect, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back surface cannot be visually recognized in a specific symbol area that does not include the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stopped on the winning line LN. Do.

  In addition, in the front effect during non-game, the sub-control unit 91 displays an image or the like in the specific symbol area corresponding to the line in which the specific symbol combination is aligned in the transparent area 51b. It is possible to display an image or the like in an area other than the specific symbol area. In such a case, an image to display the transmittance of the image or the like to be displayed outside the specific symbol area in the specific symbol area. Display according to the transmittance. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the decorative images J1 to J6 are transmitted in specific symbol areas including areas corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stopped on the winning line LN. When displaying as 20%, the images L1 and L2 displayed in the transmissive area 51b other than the specific symbol area are also displayed with the transmittance set to 20%, and stopped on the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 40 (c). When the decorative images K1 to K3 are displayed with a transmittance of 0% in a specific symbol area that does not include an area corresponding to the symbol of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the image L3 displayed in the transmission area 51b other than the specific symbol area Also, the transmittance is displayed as 0%.

  Thereby, when displaying the image etc. displayed in the transmissive area | region 51b containing a specific design area | region over the area | region D whose transmittance | permeability is 20%-100%, and the area | region E whose transmittance | permeability is 0%-100%, Since the entire transmittance of the image or the like is displayed on the transmissive region 51b in accordance with the transmittance of the region having the highest minimum transmittance, the visual aspect of the image or the like is not changed at the boundary between the regions having different transmittances. Thus, the visibility of the entire image can be integrated.

  Further, when an image or the like to be displayed in the transmissive area 51b including the specific symbol area is displayed in an area including the area D having a transmittance of 20% to 100%, the entire transmittance of the image or the like is changed to the transmittance. Is displayed in the transmissive area 51b as 20%, so that it is possible to prevent the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back side of the area where the image or the like is displayed from becoming invisible.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment causes the reel front surface effect to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 in which the transmission area 51b is arranged on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It is possible to change the visual aspect of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by performing the above, and during the game executed when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to rotate in the reel front effect. In the front effect, the effect of changing the visual appearance of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is not executed in the region where the winning line LN in which the winning is determined in the transmission region 51b, and the reel 2L is not used in the region where the winning line LN does not pass. While the effect of changing the visual appearance of 2C and 2R is executed, the winning line LN passes in the front effect of the reel that is executed after the reels are stopped, and the non-game front effect. Including band to perform the effect of changing the visible aspect of the reels.

  In such a configuration, after all the reels are stopped, the effect can be enhanced by executing a non-game-playing effect that changes the visual appearance of the reels including the area through which the winning line LN passes. It becomes difficult to confirm the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN after the stop.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment causes the front surface of the reel to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 in which the transmission region 51b is disposed on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It is possible to change the visual appearance of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by performing an effect. In the non-game frontal performance that is a reel front effect after all the reels have stopped, the winning line LN is included in the transparent area 51b. When an image or the like is displayed in a region other than the specific region that passes through, control is performed to display the image or the like with the first transmittance (0% to 100%), and the specific that the winning line LN passes through the transmission region 51b. When displaying an image or the like in a region, it is possible to perform control for displaying the image or the like with a second transmittance (20% to 100%) higher than the first transmittance. The symbol to be judged stops Is, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect while ensuring the visibility of a specific area through which the winning line LN.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 includes a region other than the specific region through which the winning line LN passes among the plurality of lines straddling the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the transparent region 51b (in this embodiment, the invalid lines LM1 and LM2 pass). When an image or the like is displayed in an area corresponding to a line passing through (area), the image or the like is displayed at the first transmittance (0% to 100%), while a winning line among the plurality of lines is displayed. In a case where an image or the like is displayed in a region corresponding to a line passing through a specific region through which the LN passes (in this embodiment, a winning line LN, an invalid line LM3, LM4), a second transmission higher than the first transmittance is used. Since control is performed to display an image or the like at a rate (20% to 100%), an area other than the specific area is ensured while the visibility of the specific area through which the winning line LN passes is stopped. And special Can be eliminated discomfort due to the transmittance of such image displayed in both areas is changed.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 displays an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 which is an image display means in which a transmission region 51b is arranged on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The display mode of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be changed by performing the reel front effect to be performed. Other than the liquid crystal display 51 provided, for example, a transmissive display device (EL display, light guide plate, etc.) is arranged on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the reels 2L, 2C, A configuration in which the visibility of symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back side of the displayed image or the like may be changed by displaying an image or the like on the front side of the 2R.

  In the non-game front performance, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment has a region corresponding to a line passing through a specific region through which the winning line LN passes at least a part of a plurality of lines straddling the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In the embodiment, an image or the like is displayed on the winning line LN, the invalid line LM3 or LM4, and an image or the like is displayed on an area other than the specific area where the line does not pass. Since all the images and the like are displayed as the second transmittance (20% to 100%) for any region where the image is displayed in the region 51b, the image displayed in the transmissive region 51b, etc. It is possible to eliminate the uncomfortable feeling caused by the change in transmittance of each image or the like.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a blue 7-match replay winning is generated as the first winning, a specific region through which the winning line LN passes at least partially by crossing the winning line LN among a plurality of lines. When a combination of symbols of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is arranged as a specific combination on the invalid line LM4 that passes through and a red 7-match replay winning occurs as the second winning combination, the winning line LN must be crossed. The invalid line LM2 has no red line, the red 7-red 7-red 7 symbol combination as a specific combination, and the sub-control unit 91 generates a blue 7-match replay winning as the first winning. In such a case, control is performed to display an image or the like in an area corresponding to the invalid line LM4 in which the combination of the symbols “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is aligned, and a red 7-match replay winning is performed as the second winning. When it occurs, the first prize or the second prize is generated by performing control to display an image or the like in the area corresponding to the invalid line LM2 in which the combination of the symbols “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned. Since an image or the like is displayed in an area corresponding to a line with a specific combination when it is done, it can be clearly recognized that the first winning or the second winning has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, when the first prize is generated, a combination of symbols “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is prepared as a specific combination, and when the second prize is generated, A configuration in which a combination of symbols “red 7-red 7-red 7” is arranged as a combination, that is, a specific combination that is arranged when the first prize and the second prize are generated is different. The specific combination that is aligned when the second prize is generated may be a common symbol combination.

  The transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 of the present embodiment has a transmittance of 0% when displaying a black image, and the sub-control unit 91 performs a winning line LN in the transmission area 51b during the non-game front performance. Control for displaying an image or the like as a first transmittance (0% to 100%) or a second transmittance (20% to 100%) higher than the first transmittance in a region other than the specific region through which the The first transmittance is a transmittance (0%) at which, when a black image or the like is displayed as a predetermined image, the design of the reel on the back side of the image or the like becomes invisible. Therefore, when displaying an image or the like in a region other than the specific region in the transmissive region 51b, the image can be displayed vividly with the highest contrast and the image can be viewed most easily, thereby enhancing the effect. be able to.

  The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs a reel front effect that displays an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 in which the transmission area 51b is arranged on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It is possible to change the visual aspect of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and it is a reel front effect, and when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is being performed, Since a specific area through which the winning line LN passes in the transmissive area 51b is controlled so as not to display an image or the like as an effect-prohibited area, it is a winning determination target during the game, that is, during the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. It is possible to ensure the visibility of a predetermined area through which the winning line LN that causes the symbol to stop is passed.

  In this embodiment, in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN set for determining whether the winning symbol combination and the symbol combination constituting the winning line are aligned on the winning line, the winning line LN. The invalid line set separately from the game state, the set number of bets, the lottery result, etc., is set uniformly, but the winning line and the invalid line are in the game state and the set bet It is good also as a structure which changes according to the number, the result of lottery, etc.

  Further, in this embodiment, the area on the reel through which the winning line and the invalid line pass, the area on the left reel through which only the winning line LN passes (middle stage), and the area through which only the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 pass (upper stage, lower stage). In the middle reel, it is composed of an area through which only the invalid line LM1 or LM2 passes (upper stage, lower stage), an area through which both the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM3, LM4 pass (middle stage), and in the right reel, It is composed of a region through which only the winning line LN passes (middle stage) and a region through which only the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 pass (upper stage, lower stage), but only the winning line passes through the area on the reel through which the winning line and the invalid line pass. Any configuration may be used as long as it is either a region, a region through which only the invalid line passes, or a region through which both the valid line and the invalid line pass.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 can change the visual appearance of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by displaying an image or the like on the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 in the reel front effect. However, the visual recognition mode of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be changed by changing the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 disposed on the rear surface of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In such a configuration, when the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 corresponding to an area other than the specific area through which the winning line LN passes is changed, the reel LED 55 is lit at the first luminance level (for example, 0% to 100%). When the control is performed and the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 corresponding to the specific area through which the winning line LN passes is changed, the reel LED 55 is lit at a second luminance higher than the first luminance (for example, 20% to 100%). By performing the control, the symbol to be determined for winning is stopped, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect while ensuring the visibility of the specific area through which the winning line LN passes.

  Further, in such a configuration, when changing the lighting state of the reel LED 55 corresponding to the specific area through which the winning line LN passes and the area other than the specific area, the second luminance (for example, for example, 20% to 100%), the brightness of the reel LEDs 55 in both the area other than the specific area and the specific area changes while ensuring the visibility of the specific area through which the winning line LN passes. You can eliminate the sense of incongruity.

  Next, a modified example of the winning line and reel symbols will be described with reference to FIG.

  In this embodiment, the winning line LN set to determine whether the winning symbol combination is passed through the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, but in this modified example, the winning line LN is on the left. The configuration passes through the lower stage of the reel, the middle stage of the middle reel, and the upper stage of the right reel. Further, in this embodiment, each reel has a configuration in which independent symbols are drawn in an area for one symbol in the reel. However, in this modification, one reel is represented by a plurality of consecutive symbols in the left reel. This is a configuration in which continuous symbols (in this variation, a pair of upper and lower frame symbols) forming related symbols are drawn.

  In this embodiment, the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the winning line LN passes (area D in FIG. 38A) in the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, each reel The range of the transmittance of the middle region is 20% to 100%, and the region other than the region corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R through which the winning line LN passes (region E in FIG. 38A), That is, the transmittance range of the upper and lower regions of each reel is 0% to 100%. In this modification, the reel 2L through which the winning line LN passes through the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51. As the area D corresponding to the symbols 2C and 2R, the area of the left reel lower stage, middle reel middle stage, and right reel upper stage is set to 20% to 100% transmittance, and the reel 2L through which the winning line LN passes, 2C, 2R design As an area E except response region, the upper and middle left reel, the reel upper and lower, are middle and lower regions of the right reel is set to 0% transmittance and 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (a), a line passing through the lower stage of the left reel, the middle stage of the middle reel, and the upper stage of the right reel, that is, a line connecting the symbols arranged in the diagonally upward direction is set as the winning line, and the other lines are set. It is set as an invalid line. Thus, without disturbing the visibility of the symbols arranged on the winning line, the upper left and middle stages of the left reel, the upper left substantially triangular area consisting of the upper stage of the middle reel, the middle stage and lower stage of the right reel, and the lower stage of the middle reel. It is possible to display an image or the like over a wide area using the lower right substantially triangular area.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the left reel is drawn in a continuous symbol area that forms a pair of frames, and the upper frame symbol and the lower frame symbol constituting the continuous symbol Are arranged continuously. The inside of one frame composed of the upper frame and the lower frame is white so that the visibility of the image displayed in the transmission region 51b on the front side of the symbol is enhanced.

  Further, in the present modification, the sub-control unit 91 can execute the reel front effect as in the present embodiment. In the front effect during the reel front effect, the sub-control unit 91 wins in the transmissive area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51. An area corresponding to the design of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the line LN passes is set as an effect prohibition area that prohibits display of an image or the like, and the effect prohibition area among the display area 51a and the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 By displaying an image or the like in an area other than the image, an effect of displaying an image or the like on the front surface of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed as in the case of the configuration of the present embodiment. Further, in the front effect during non-game of reel front effect, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the winning line LN passes without setting the effect prohibition region like the front effect during game in the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 are used. By displaying images and the like in all the transmissive areas 51b and the display areas 51a including the areas corresponding to the symbols, the images and the like are superimposed on the front surfaces of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as in the case of the configuration of the present embodiment. An effect to be displayed is performed.

  In the non-game front effect, in the left reel, when the pair of symbols constituting the continuous symbol stops at one of the upper and middle stages of the reel, or the middle and lower stages, the corresponding symbol of the transmission area 51b By displaying an image or the like in an area corresponding to the white area, an effect of displaying the image or the like on the front side of the white area of the left reel is performed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the continuous symbols stop in the upper and middle stages of the left reel, that is, in the areas other than the lower reel area through which the winning line LN passes, When the lower frame symbol) is stopped, one character image M1 is displayed at a transmittance of 0% in a region corresponding to the white region of the continuous symbol in the transmission region 51b. Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), when the continuous symbols stop in the middle and lower stages of the left reel, that is, in the area including the lower reel area through which the winning line LN passes, the continuous symbols (upper frame symbols and lower frames). When the frame symbol) is stopped, the image M2 of one character is displayed at a transmittance of 20% in the region corresponding to the white region of the continuous symbol in the transmission region 51b.

  As a result, an image or the like to be displayed in the transmissive area 51b including the specific pattern area is divided into a white area of the continuous pattern, that is, an area D having a transmittance of 20% to 100% and an area E having a transmittance of 0% to 100%. When the image is displayed over the entire area, the entire transmittance of the image or the like is displayed on the transmission region 51b in accordance with the transmittance of the region where the minimum value of the transmittance is high. In an image or the like, the visual aspect of the image or the like does not change at the boundary of each symbol, and the visibility of the entire image can be integrated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), in the non-game front effect, the image M2 is displayed in a region corresponding to the continuous symbol in the transparent region 51b, and the region corresponding to the left reel where the continuous symbol is stopped. In the case where an image or the like (image M3 in the present modification) is displayed in an area other than the area corresponding to the continuous pattern, the transmittance of all these images and the like is determined for the area in which the image or the like is displayed. It is displayed in accordance with the higher one of the transmittance or the transmittance of the region where the image M2 is displayed, that is, the transmittance is set to 20%.

  Thus, when a plurality of images or the like are displayed in the area corresponding to the left reel in the transmission area 51b, the area corresponding to the stopped continuous pattern and the other area corresponding to the left reel, all the images are displayed. Is displayed in accordance with the transmittance of the region where the minimum value of the transmittance is high. Therefore, in the region corresponding to the left reel in the transmissive region 51b, the transmittance is different for each of the plurality of images. The form does not change, and the visibility of the entire plurality of images can be integrated.

  In this modification, a configuration has been described in which a continuous symbol is arranged on the left reel, and when the continuous symbol stops at a predetermined position of the reel, a front effect during non-game is performed. It is also arranged on the right reel, and even when the continuous symbols stop on these reels, the front effect during non-game may be executed. Even in such a configuration, the continuous symbols in the transmission area 51b are stopped. When a plurality of images are displayed in an area corresponding to the reel, corresponding to the stopped continuous pattern, and other areas corresponding to the reel, the transmittance of all the images, etc. By displaying in accordance with the transmittance of the region having the highest minimum value, the visibility of the entire plurality of images is integrated in the region corresponding to the reel where the continuous pattern in the transmissive region 51b is stopped. Rukoto can.

  Further, in the configuration in which a continuous symbol is arranged on a plurality of reels and the front symbol is rendered during non-game when the continuous symbol stops at a predetermined position of the reel, the reel in which the continuous symbol stops in the transmission area 51b. When a plurality of images are displayed in the corresponding areas, the areas corresponding to the stopped symbols, and other areas (including areas corresponding to reels other than the reels where the symbols are stopped) By displaying the transmissivity of all the images in accordance with the transmissivity of the region where the minimum transmissivity is high among the regions where these images are displayed, the entire plurality of images displayed in the translucent region 51b The visibility can be made unitary.

  Further, the continuous symbols may be arranged on the middle reel and the right reel other than the left reel, and even if one continuous symbol extends over the area of two symbols, it is more than three symbols. A configuration over an area may be used. In addition, a continuous symbol is a configuration in which a single symbol is represented by a pair of symbols arranged in a plurality of symbol regions, but not limited to a pair of symbols, the same symbol is continuously displayed. Arranged in a plurality of symbol areas, for example, by arranging the same “red 7” in successive symbol areas, it can be visually recognized as if an integrated symbol is drawn in a series of reel areas. Such a mode may be sufficient.

  In this modification, a line passing through the lower left reel, the middle middle reel, and the upper right reel, that is, the line connecting the symbols arranged in the diagonally upward direction is set as the winning line, and the other lines are set as invalid lines. Although it is set, the line that passes the upper part of the left reel, the middle part of the middle reel, and the lower part of the right reel, that is, the line that connects the symbols arranged in the diagonally downward direction is set as the winning line and the other lines are set as invalid lines Alternatively, an irregular line passing through the upper stage of the left reel, the upper stage of the middle reel, and the middle stage of the right reel may be set as a winning line, and the other lines may be set as invalid lines. Even in such a configuration, even when the line connecting the symbols arranged in the diagonally lower right direction or the irregular line is used as the winning line, the middle stage of the left reel is not hindered by the visibility of the symbols arranged in the winning line. In addition, an image or the like can be displayed in a wide continuous area such as a lower left substantially triangular area including the lower and middle reels.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present modification, a continuous symbol (in this variation, a pair of upper frame and lower frame) is arranged on the left reel. The sub-control unit 91 displays an image or the like in a region other than the specific region through which the winning line LN passes in the transparent region 51b in the non-game frontal performance that is the reel front effect after all reels are stopped. In the case where control is performed to display an image or the like with the first transmittance (0% to 100%), and the image or the like is displayed in a specific region through which the winning line LN passes in the transmissive region 51b, the first The sub-control unit 91 can control to display an image or the like with a second transmittance (20% to 100%) higher than the transmittance of the symbol. Other than the specific region of the transmission region 51b When the image is stopped on the position corresponding to the area and the image is displayed on the transmission area 51b while being superimposed on the continuous pattern, the image is displayed at the first transmittance (0% to 100%). When at least a part of the symbols constituting the continuous symbol is stopped at a position corresponding to the specific region of the transmission area 51b and the remaining symbols are stopped at a position corresponding to a region other than the specific region. When displaying an image or the like superimposed on the continuous pattern, control is performed to display the image or the like with the second transmittance (20% to 100%), that is, a region other than the specific region in the transmissive region 51b. When displaying an image or the like across the region and the specific region, both the region other than the specific region and the specific region in the transmission region 51b corresponding to the stopped continuous pattern are more than the first transmittance. High second transmission (2 % To 100%), so that the visibility of the specific area from which the symbol to be determined for winning is derived is ensured, and images displayed in both the area other than the specific area and the specific area are displayed. A sense of incongruity due to a change in transmittance can be eliminated.

  The sub-control unit 91 of the present modified example displays an image or the like superimposed on the continuous symbol when the symbol constituting the continuous symbol is derived to a specific region through the winning line LN in the transmission region 51b. In the case where an image or the like is displayed even in a region where the symbols constituting the continuous symbols are not derived, the second transmittance (20% to 100%) is set for any region where the image or the like is displayed in the transmissive region 51b. ), The control for displaying the image is performed, so that the uncomfortable feeling caused by the change in the transmittance of the image displayed in the transmissive region 51b can be eliminated.

  Next, an error notification effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment will be described.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment, for example, as described above, detects various errors (medal insertion error, medal selector 29, etc.) when any of a rotation error, medal insertion error, and medal payout error is detected in the reel control process. Foreign object detection, reel rotation abnormality, medal payout abnormality, foreign object detection near the payout exit, RAM abnormality, setting value abnormality, hopper tank 34a empty, overflow tank 35 full tank detection, abnormal winning, etc.) In addition, an error command capable of specifying the type of abnormality detected by executing error processing is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. As shown in FIG. 42, the error command includes error codes E1 to E8 that can identify the type of abnormality that has occurred. E1 is an overflow error, indicating that a full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is detected, E2 is a medal supply error, indicating that an empty state of the hopper tank 34a is detected, and E3 is a medal A clogging error indicates that a foreign object in the vicinity of the medal payout exit 9 has been detected. E4 is a medal payout error, which is performed when reel rotation processing is performed and no payout is originally performed. E5 indicates a medal insertion error, indicates that an abnormal medal passage by the insertion medal sensor 31 has been detected, and E6 indicates a rotation error, and reel rotation. E7 is an abnormal winning error, indicating that a winning combination for which a winning is not permitted by an internal lottery has been detected. It is RAM error indicates that the data of RAM41c is detected to be not normal at startup.

  Further, when the output state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed, when the door command is shifted to the setting change state at the time of activation, the setting command is not set after one game. When the estimated transition time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses and a transition is made to a standby state, a standby command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 receives the error command, performs an error notification effect that notifies the error code specified based on the error command, and receives the door command, thereby receiving the front door 1b. When it is specified that the front door 1b is in an open state, a door open notification effect that notifies that the front door 1b is opened is executed, and a setting command is received to indicate that it is in a setting change state. The notification effect during the setting change is executed, and the standby effect indicating the standby state is executed by receiving the standby command.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the error notification effect, the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting the display of images and the like, and the display area excluding the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 In the predetermined area 51a (in the predetermined frame A in this embodiment), the error code specified based on the error command and the characters and images indicating the contents of the error are the same area regardless of the type of error. To display. That is, the reels 2L, 2C through which the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to 4 pass, are controlled in the error state in the main control unit 41 and the error notification effect is being executed. The display area 51a that overlaps the area corresponding to the 2R symbol does not display an image or the like, and the transmittance is always 100%, so that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be viewed through the transmission area 51b. It is designed so that it does not deteriorate.

  In the error notification effect, the game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits displayed in the front effect during the game is made invisible to the player, and as shown in FIG. 42, the effect effect LED 52a -C are turned on in a predetermined lighting mode indicating that an error has occurred, and a predetermined sound indicating that an error has occurred is output from the speakers 53 and 54, whereby the liquid crystal display 51 and the production are produced. The effect LEDs 52a to 52c and the speakers 53 and 54 are used to notify the type of error that has occurred.

  Thereby, the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to be in an error state in the main control unit 41, and the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4 in the period in which the error notification effect is executed. Since an image or the like is not displayed in the display area 51a that overlaps the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the reel passes, a liquid crystal display is displayed when an error occurs during the execution of the reel front effect described above. By switching the effect mode at the device 51 from the front effect to the error notification effect, all regions including the regions corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the invalid lines LM1 to 4 pass through the transmission region 51b are transmitted. The occurrence of an abnormality specified by the error command is notified with the visibility at a normal time in which the rate is 100%.

  Regardless of the type of error, a common control, that is, a common production prohibition area is set, and an error code or the like is displayed in a common predetermined area, so that an error is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in the door opening notification effect, the effect effects LEDs 52a to 52c are lit in a predetermined lighting state indicating that the front door 1b is in the open state, and the front door 1b is in the open state from the speakers 53 and 54. By outputting a predetermined sound indicating that it is, the effect type LEDs 52a to 52c and the speakers 53 and 54 are used to notify the type of error that has occurred. In addition, in the door opening notification effect, the display mode performed before receiving the door command is continued without changing the display mode of the liquid crystal display 51 based on the reception of the door command. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44, in the notification effect during setting change, similarly to the error notification effect, the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting display of images and the like. A message indicating that the setting is changed is displayed in a predetermined area (in the predetermined frame B in this embodiment) of the display area 51a excluding the transmission area 51b of the display device 51, and the setting change state is controlled. Inform the effect. In the notification during setting change, similarly to the error notification effect, the game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits is made invisible to the player.

  Accordingly, the reel is controlled by the main control unit 41 in the setting change state and the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 pass through during the period during which the setting change effect is being executed. An image or the like is not displayed over the area corresponding to the 2L, 2C, 2R symbols, and the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R through the transmissive area 51b is not reduced. Yes.

  The standby production executed by the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment includes a normal demonstration production (hereinafter referred to as a demonstration production) indicating that it is in a standby state, and power consumption in the slot machine 1 compared to the demonstration production. The sub-control unit 91 shifts the main control unit 41 to the standby state when the power-saving mode is selected in advance as the effect mode of the standby effect by the standby effect switch 57. When the power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode is executed. When the power saving mode is not selected, a normal demonstration effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), in the demonstration effect, similarly to the error notification effect, the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting display of images and the like. A message indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed is displayed in a predetermined area (in the predetermined frame B in the present embodiment) of the display area 51a excluding the 51 transmission areas 51b, indicating that the setting change state is being controlled. Inform. In addition, in the demonstration production, among the game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits, the number of games since the end of ART or RB is made visible to the player, while other history information is made invisible. To do. It should be noted that history information other than the number of games since the end of ART or RB may be visible from the player or the like, and all the history information that can be displayed is visible from the player or the like. The slot machine 1 is installed with a predetermined priority, for example, information that is advantageous to a player who has played a game up to that point, and information that is advantageous to a new player who will subsequently play a game. It may be configured such that a predetermined part of the history information can be visually recognized by the player or the like in accordance with the fact that the information is useful for management or operation for the store clerk or the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, in the demonstration effect, the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c are used by lighting the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c in a predetermined lighting state indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed. Production is to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the power saving mode, similarly to the error notification effect, the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting the display of an image or the like. A message indicating that the power-saving mode is displayed in a predetermined area (in the predetermined frame B in this embodiment) of the display area 51a excluding the transmission area 51b of the device 51, and that the setting change state is controlled. Is notified. Further, in the notification during the setting change, similarly to the error notification effect, information relating to the game history such as the number of credits is made invisible to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, in the power saving mode, the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c are not turned on unlike the demonstration effect, and the effect using the minimum effect device including only the liquid crystal display 51 is executed. It has become.

  In this manner, the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in the standby state, and during the period in which the demonstration effect or the power saving mode is executed as the standby effect, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to LM1. An image or the like is not displayed over the area corresponding to the design of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the LM 4 passes, and the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through the transmission area 51b is not deteriorated. It has become.

  Next, an effect performed by the sub control unit 91 using the reel LED 55 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

  The reel LED 55 is provided inside each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and each reel 2L, 2C, 2R irradiates each symbol on the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 independently from behind. Is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 46, for example, reel LEDs 55L11, 55L12, and 55L13 that can irradiate the symbol from the back side are arranged in the horizontal direction inside the position corresponding to the upper symbol of the left reel 2L. Similarly, three reel LEDs 55L21 to 23 and 55L31 to 33 are provided for each symbol in the other middle and lower stages of the left reel 2L, and the reel LEDs 55C11 to 55L11 are similarly applied to the other middle reel 2C and right reel 2R. 13, 55C21 to 23, 55C31 to 33, 55R11 to 13, 55R21 to 23, and 55R31 to 33 (not shown in FIG. 46) are provided, and the reel LED 55 is composed of a total of 36 LEDs.

  The sub-control unit 91 can independently control each LED constituting the reel LED 55 to turn off, turn on with low luminance, and turn on with high luminance. When the lighting state of each reel LED 55 is controlled, the sub-control unit 91 controls the lighting state of each LED of the reel LED 55 to be turned off. When a control signal is output from the LED drive circuits 93a to 93c to control lighting with high luminance, a high luminance ON state in which a predetermined voltage (for example, 5V) is applied to the corresponding LED at a predetermined duty ratio. When the control signal is output from the LED drive circuits 93a to 93c to control the lighting with low luminance, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5V) is applied to the corresponding LED with a predetermined duty ratio lower than that in the case of high luminance. ) Is applied from the LED drive circuits 93a to 93c.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is configured to cause the reel LED 55 to emit light with low luminance and high luminance by changing the duty ratio of the control signal output from the LED drive circuits 93a to 93c. By turning on only a predetermined part of the plurality of LEDs constituting the reel LED 55 and turning off the other part of the LED, that is, by controlling the number of LEDs to be turned on or off, The configuration may be such that the luminance is changed, or the entire luminance of the reel LED 55 or a part of the luminance is changed by changing the luminance value of each LED by changing the current value to be supplied to each LED constituting the reel LED 55. It may be.

  As shown in FIGS. 47B and 47D, when the sub-control unit 91 stops a predetermined symbol combination (a combination of symbols constituting a combination, a reach eye or a chance eye combination) on the winning line LN. The backlight effect that changes the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the sub control unit 91 receives a game end command from the main control unit 41, a combination of predetermined symbols on the pay line LN is stopped on the win line LN, and When the above-mentioned reel front effect is not being executed, that is, when an image or the like is not displayed on the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the see-through windows 3 are displayed. The lighting mode of the reel LEDs 55 in the area is changed a predetermined number of times between turning off and turning on (high luminance) all at once (see FIG. 47 (a)), and a blinking backlight effect is executed, whereby the reels 2L, 2C, The visibility of the 2R symbol is changed to notify that the combination of the predetermined symbols has stopped.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), when the sub control unit 91 receives a game end command from the main control unit 41, a combination of predetermined symbols on the pay line LN is stopped on the win line LN. When the above-described reel front effect is executed, that is, when an image or the like is displayed on the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R correspond to the see-through windows 3 respectively. By changing the lighting mode of the reel LEDs 55 in all the regions to a predetermined number of times (see FIG. 47 (c)) by simultaneously turning on (low luminance) and lighting (high luminance), and executing a flashing backlight effect, The visibility of the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is changed to notify that the combination of the predetermined symbols has stopped.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 executes the reel front effect when executing the backlight effect, and when the image or the like is displayed on the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, the reel LED 55 is displayed. By changing the lighting mode between high-brightness lighting and low-brightness lighting without turning off, the transmissive area 51b is irradiated with a luminance higher than that of the low-luminance lighting, so that the transmissive area 51b is displayed. The backlight effect can be executed while ensuring visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back surface of the image and the like and the transmission region 51b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48A, when executing the backlight effect, the sub control unit 91 switches the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 between extinguishing or lighting (low luminance) and lighting (high luminance). At the same time, the transmissive region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is kept constant at a high transmittance (for example, 100%) to change the visibility of the transmissive region 51b and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back, while FIG. As shown in (b), when the backlight display is not executed and the dark display mode for reducing the visibility of the transmissive region 51b is set, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 is kept on (high luminance). By reducing the transmittance of the transmissive region 51b, the visibility of the transmissive region 51b and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment moves the protruding body 301 of the accessory 300 from the storage position to the protruding position, and performs the accessory effect that lights the rotating lamp 302 in a predetermined lighting mode. When a special part is elected in the internal lottery and when it is elected in the ART lottery, the part effect lottery that determines the timing for executing the accessory effect is executed and determined by the relevant part effect lottery. The effect production is executed at the end of the played game.

  Whether or not the sub-control unit 91 is set so as to restrict the production by the production restriction switch 58 when the game end command is received when the game determined by the accessory production lottery is finished. If the determination is not made and the production is not set to be restricted, a warning message indicating that the protrusion 301 of the accessory 300 operates and moves to the protrusion position is displayed on the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51. . Thereafter, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect motor 305 is driven to move the projecting body 301 from the storage position to the projecting position, and the rotating lamp 302 is rotated while being turned on. In addition, the production sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 in accordance with the lighting and rotation of the rotating lamp 302. After that, the setting sound is switched to the effect mode of the next game by performing the setting operation of the betting number for starting the next game, and the revolving light 302 is moved to the storage position after a predetermined time has passed. The lighting and rotation are stopped while the effect production is ended.

  On the other hand, at the end of the game that executes the effect production, it is determined whether or not the production restriction switch 58 is set to restrict the production. Is not displayed and the projecting body 301 of the accessory 300 is not moved to the projecting position, and the rotating lamp 302 is turned on and rotated, and the production sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 in accordance with the lighting and rotation of the rotating lamp 302. . After that, the bet number setting operation for starting the next game is performed, so that the effect sound is switched to the effect mode of the next game, and when the predetermined time elapses, the lighting and rotation of the rotating lamp 302 are stopped. To finish the effect production.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment includes the accessory 300, and can execute an effect of projecting the protruding body 301 of the accessory 300 above the slot machine 1, and the effect restriction switch 58. Therefore, an island facility or the like is provided above the place where the slot machine 1 is installed in a game shop or the like. However, by restricting in advance that the effect of projecting the projecting body 301 is performed, the projecting body 301 is projected above the slot machine 1 and interferes with an island facility or the like above the slot machine 1. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment includes an accessory 300, can perform an effect of projecting the protruding body 301 of the accessory 300 above the slot machine 1, and protrudes by the effect restriction switch 58. It is a configuration that can be set in advance to restrict the execution of the effect that causes the body 301 to protrude. When the effect that causes the protrusion 301 of the accessory 300 to protrude, the protrusion of the accessory 300 is performed. Since a caution message indicating that the body 301 moves and moves to the protruding position is displayed, the player or the like can be alerted to that effect before the protruding body 301 is protruded.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment includes an accessory 300, can perform an effect of projecting the protruding body 301 of the accessory 300 above the slot machine 1, and protrudes by the effect restriction switch 58. When it is set to restrict in advance that the effect of projecting the body 301 is executed, and when it is set to restrict in advance that the effect of projecting the projecting body 301 is executed In this case, the caution message is not displayed, and the projecting body 301 is not projected in the production, so that it is possible to prevent the caution message from being displayed even though the projecting body does not project.

  In the present embodiment, the accessory 300 is configured to include a projecting body 301 that can project upward from the slot machine 1, but is configured to include a projecting body that can project to the left and right of the slot machine 1 and forward. May be. In such a configuration, it is possible to restrict the execution of the effect of projecting the projecting body by operating the effect limiting switch or the like, so that the projecting body is projected and collides with objects around the slot machine 1. Can be prevented. Further, in such a configuration, when the execution of the effect of projecting the projecting body is restricted by an operation of the effect limiting switch or the like, a warning message indicating that the projecting body operates and moves to the projecting position is displayed on the liquid crystal. By adopting a configuration that does not display on a display device or the like, it is possible to prevent a caution message from being displayed even though the protruding body does not protrude.

  The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment has a transmissive area 51b in which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are visible from the player side at a position on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. And a symbol area of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that is visible to the player by displaying an image or the like in the transparent area 51b in response to receiving a command from the main control unit 41, etc. In the front area of the overlapping reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, it is possible to execute an effect that changes the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the player side to a different visibility from the normal one.

  In such a configuration, in the transparent area 51b, in the specific area corresponding to the symbol of each reel that does not pass the winning line LN for which the winning is determined, it is permitted to execute the effect of changing the reel visibility. In the predetermined area corresponding to the design of each reel through which the winning line LN passes, by prohibiting the execution of the effect, the reel 2L is secured while ensuring the visibility of the area on the winning line LN of each reel. 2C and 2R can be performed in front, but the visibility of the predetermined area other than the winning line LN remains changed even if the visibility is ensured only in the predetermined area on the winning line LN. Then, when an event such as an abnormality related to the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R occurs, it becomes difficult to grasp the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can detect that a specific event has occurred when a specific event that may cause an abnormality such as a reel rotation error has occurred. The sub-control unit 91 can execute an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the player side in the transmissive region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, and is playing a game. In the specific area corresponding to the design of each reel that does not pass the winning line LN in the transparent area 51b during which the winning line is determined during the period and at least one reel 2L, 2C, 2R is rotating. When a specific event occurs in the state where an effect of changing to visibility is performed so that the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R from the side is lowered than usual, the specific area of the transmission region 51b Since the occurrence of a specific event is reported with normal visibility with the transmittance of all areas including 100%, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated during the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R as the game progresses. When performing the effect of changing the visibility, by changing the visibility of the specific area of the transmission area 51b, the transmission area as wide as possible without reducing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the predetermined area. While it is possible to produce the effect of changing the visibility at 51b, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the area including the specific area of the transmission area 51b during the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as the game progresses. When a specific event occurs in the situation where the effect of changing is performed, the visibility of the entire area including the specific area of the transmission area 51b is secured, and the reels 2L, 2C The status of 2R can be easily grasped.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 has a transmittance of 100 in the transmission area 51b as an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the player side in the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51. % Of images, etc., and the image of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is displayed on the front surface of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to change the visibility of the rear reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In the effect of changing the visibility of 2C and 2R, it is only necessary to change the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R corresponding to the fluoroscopic window 3 from normal visibility to special visibility. A transmissive display device other than a liquid crystal display, for example, an EL display, a light guide plate, etc., is arranged on the front side (player side) of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and an image is displayed on the transmissive display. No state or transparent It is possible to superimpose on the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, which changes the normal visibility that is in the state of being changed to a special visibility in which the image is displayed or the transmittance is reduced A movable object, a so-called accessory, which changes the normal visibility in which the movable object is not superimposed on the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to a special visibility in which the movable object is superimposed, reels 2L, 2C, The backlight is placed on the back side of the 2R design, etc., and the normal visibility in which the backlight emits light with normal color (white, etc.) and with normal illuminance, the backlight color, illuminance and brightness It may be changed or changed to special visibility by turning on / off.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the sub-control unit 91 is performing an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the player side in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, the specific event is When the possibility that an abnormality such as a reel rotation error has occurred on the main control unit 41 side is detected, the transmittance of all areas including the specific area of the transmissive area 51b is set to 100% and specified with normal visibility. Although it is the structure which alert | reports generation | occurrence | production of an event, a specific event is not restricted to what is detected by the main control part 41, For example, what is detected in the sub control part 91, for example, abnormality regarding the sub control part 91, a sub control part 91 may be an abnormality related to each effect device controlled by 91, and when notifying these abnormalities using the liquid crystal display 51, all areas including the specific area of the transmission area 51b The transmittance may be configured to notify a normal visibility as 100%. In such a configuration, when an abnormality on the side of the sub-control unit 91 that is not directly related to the game occurs, all the areas of the transmissive area 51b are set to normal visibility. Can be prevented.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment changes the visibility of the reel in a predetermined area corresponding to the design of each reel through the winning line LN in the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 in the front effect during the game. In the front effect during the game, at least one reel is rotated for the progress of the game. Any configuration that prohibits the execution of the effect in a predetermined area corresponding to the design of each reel through which the line LN passes is possible. For example, after the start switch 7 is operated, The stop operation for stopping the reel is invalidated during a delay period in which the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is delayed or after the rotation of the reel is started. In a period that is not directly related to the progress of the game, such as a period controlled by a Leeds state, the reel visibility is changed in a predetermined area corresponding to the design of each reel through the winning line LN in the transparent area 51b. May be configured to be executable without prohibiting the execution of. Even in such a configuration, at least in the period where at least one reel is rotated for the progress of the game, the effect is executed in a predetermined area corresponding to the design of each reel through which the winning line LN passes. In the same way as in the present embodiment, when a specific event occurs, the visibility of the entire area including the specific area of the transmissive area 51b is ensured, and the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is facilitated. Can be grasped.

  The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment displays an image or the like on the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 even during a period when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not rotating, thereby allowing the front surfaces of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to be displayed. As a specific event in a situation where the front effect during the stop can be executed as a reel front effect that displays an image or the like superimposed on the reel, and the reel front effect is executed in a period in which the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are not rotated, Even when it is detected that an abnormality such as a medal clogging error has occurred on the main control unit 41 side, a specific event with normal visibility with the transmittance of all areas including the specific area of the transmission area 51b as 100% In the situation where the reel front effect is being executed in the period when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are not rotated, Even when the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that a certain event has occurred, the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be easily grasped, and whether or not the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating. Regardless, it is possible to share control when notifying a specific event when a specific event occurs in a situation where the reel front effect is being executed.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment, when a change occurs in the output state of the door opening detection switch 25 or the like, when a predetermined event occurs among events that may have occurred abnormally, The sub-control unit 91 transmits a door command or the like that can specify a change to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 is playing a reel at least during the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as the game progresses. When the predetermined event occurs in the situation where the front effect is executed, the display mode of the liquid crystal display 51 is not changed based on the occurrence of the predetermined event, The effect LEDs 52a to 52c are turned on in a predetermined lighting state indicating that the front door 1b is in an open state, and a predetermined sound indicating that the front door 1b is in an open state is output from the speakers 53 and 54. As a result, the occurrence of a predetermined event is notified while continuing the reel front effect, so that the overall visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is normally recognized according to the importance of the event that may have caused an abnormality. It is possible to set whether to perform notification as a property or to perform notification while continuing the reel front effect.

  When the main control unit 41 of this embodiment transitions to the standby state after the end of one game, the waiting condition is satisfied when the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without setting the bet amount. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 receives the standby command, thereby executing a standby effect with the overall visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R as normal visibility. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the game is not being performed.

  The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment can execute a demonstration effect and a power saving mode as a standby effect, and displays a standby command for a demonstration effect or a power saving mode selected in advance by operating the standby effect switch 57. Although it is the structure performed when it receives, the sub-control part 91 may be the structure provided with multiple types of standby effects, or the structure provided with only one type. Moreover, in such a structure, what is necessary is just the structure which makes the visibility of the whole reel 2L, 2C, 2R the normal visibility in at least 1 type of standby production.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines whether or not the combination of symbols of a predetermined winning combination that has been won internally is stopped on one winning line LN across the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. However, the combination of symbols of the winning combination on the winning line LN is stopped, so that it is determined that the winning combination has won, but the winning line is different in the gaming state, the number of bets, etc. The structure may be changed accordingly. In such a configuration, even if the winning line changes according to the gaming state, if a specific event occurs in a situation where the reel front effect is being executed during the gaming period, the reels 2L, 2C By making the overall visibility of 2R the normal visibility and notifying the occurrence of a specific event, the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be easily grasped, and in any gaming state, etc. Even if it exists, when the specific event occurs in the situation where the reel front effect is being executed, the control for notifying the specific event can be made common.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can detect that when a rotation error of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R occurs as a specific event, and the sub-control unit 91 generates a rotation error as a specific event. In this case, since the transmittance of all the areas including the specific area of the transmission area 51b is set to 100%, the occurrence of a rotation error is notified with normal visibility. Therefore, when a rotation error occurs as a specific event, the reel 2L, The situation of 2C and 2R can be easily grasped.

  The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment irradiates the design of the reel corresponding to the see-through window 3 from the rear side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to change the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, A transmissive region 51b is arranged at a position corresponding to the see-through window 3 on the front side (player side) of 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a liquid crystal display 51 that displays images and the like on the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R; And is configured to function also as a backlight of the transmissive region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 by irradiating from the rear surfaces of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R with the reel LED55.

  In such a configuration, if the reel LED 55 is turned off in order to change the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the visibility of an image or the like displayed on the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is also lowered. It will end up.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment displays an image or the like on the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, thereby transmitting the transmission area 51b. Reel 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the reel front effect that displays the image or the like superimposed, and the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 arranged on the back of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is changed to blink, A backlight effect that changes the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be executed. When changing the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 in the backlight effect, the lighting mode is changed without turning off the reel LED 55. Since the reel LED 55 functioning as the backlight of the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is not turned off at all, the reels 2L, 2L, , It is possible to ensure the visibility of the visibility and the transmissive region 51b of 2R.

  In the present embodiment, the reel LED 55 disposed on the rear surface of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is configured to function as a backlight of the transmissive region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, but other than the transmissive region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51. Transmissive display devices such as a self-luminous display having transparency (such as an EL display), a light guide plate having transparency and displaying an image upon incidence of light are reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The reel LED 55 may be configured to function as a backlight of the transmissive display device.

  The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment displays an image or the like on the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the reels 2L, 2C corresponding to the transmission area 51b. The reels 2L, 2C, 2R are changed by blinking the reel front face effect that displays an image or the like in the 2R region and the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 arranged on the back side of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Although it is possible to execute a backlight effect that changes the visibility of the reel, it is possible to restrict the execution of the backlight effect when the reel front effect is being executed, so that the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 is not changed. Such a configuration can prevent the visibility of the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 from being hindered.

  The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment displays an image or the like on the transmissive area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, so that the reel 2L corresponding to the transmissive area 51b is displayed. The reels 2L, 2C, 2R, 2C, 2R, 2C, 2R, 2C, 2R, 2C, 2C, 2R When the backlight effect that changes the visibility of 2R can be executed and the reel front face effect is not executed, when changing the lighting state of the reel LED 55 in the backlight effect, the lighting state of the reel LED 55 is increased. While it is controlled to change repeatedly between lighting and extinguishing with brightness, in the situation where the reel front effect is being executed, When changing the lighting mode of the LED 55, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 is controlled to be repeatedly changed between lighting at high luminance and lighting at low luminance, so that the lighting mode can be changed without turning off the reel LED 55. Since the reel LED 55 that functions as the backlight of the transmissive region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is not turned off at all in the situation where the reel front effect is executed, the visibility of the transmissive region 51b is maintained. Can do.

  Since the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment makes the reel LED 55 always emit light with high brightness except when performing the backlight effect, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are activated except when performing the backlight effect. Visibility and visibility of the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 can be ensured. In such a configuration, by changing the transmittance of the transmissive region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 while always causing the reel LED 55 to emit light with high luminance, for example, by reducing the transmittance from 100% to 20%, It is also possible to execute an effect such as changing the brightness of the transmissive area 51b in the same way as changing the luminance of the reel LED 55 itself by reducing the amount of light of the reel LED 55 that is transmitted to the player side. .

  In this embodiment, the reel LED 55 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided for each of the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the see-through window 3, and the sub control unit 91 includes a plurality of LEDs that constitute the reel LED 55. Since the lighting mode can be changed by changing the luminance of each LED to a low luminance, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 can be variously controlled by independently controlling the light emission of each LED constituting the reel LED 55. Can be changed. In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the brightness of three LEDs corresponding to one symbol among the plurality of LEDs constituting the reel LED 55 is sequentially changed from the left to obtain a corresponding one. The lighting mode is such that the backlight flows from the left to the right in units of symbols, or one reel unit, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (upper, middle, and lower), reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as a whole A lighting mode in which the backlight flows in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the oblique direction can be employed.

  The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment can display an image or the like using the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c by instructing the display control circuit 92. Then, the sub-control unit 91 performs control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c mounted on the CGROM substrate 99 when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and displays the inspection result on the liquid crystal display 51. For example, when assembling the slot machine 1 in a factory or the like, an appropriate ROM is assembled on the CGROM board 99, or data stored in the ROM on the CGROM board 99 is stored. Whether it is normal or not can be inspected based on the display of the liquid crystal display 51.

  Below, the control regarding the test | inspection of CGROM99a-c which the sub control part 91 performs is demonstrated based on FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 51, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, an I / O port 91d, a display control circuit 92, LED drive circuits 93a to 93e, and a checking LED 59 are connected to the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91.

  The display control circuit 92 is a register used by the display control circuit 92 for control, a register that can be written and referenced by the display control circuit 92 and can be referenced by the sub-control unit 91, and the display control circuit 92 can be referenced. In addition, a plurality of types of control registers including a register that can be written by the sub CPU 91a are provided, and when the instruction is written to the predetermined register by the sub CPU 91a, control according to the instruction by the sub control unit 91 is executed. .

  In particular, the display control circuit 92 is written with information display data including image data necessary for displaying information such as characters and symbols on the liquid crystal display 51 in a predetermined register. The read instruction 1 which is an instruction for storing information display data in the VRAM which is the working storage area of the display control circuit 92 is written into the register of FIG. Is stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM.

  In addition, display instruction data for specifying the contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is written in a predetermined register, and an image or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 with the contents of the display instruction data in another predetermined register. By writing the display command 1 which is the above command, control is performed to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 with the content of the display instruction data using the information display data stored in the VRAM. In addition, display instruction data for specifying the contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is written in a predetermined register, and an image or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 with the contents of the display instruction data in another predetermined register. Is written, the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c is read into a predetermined register in accordance with the contents of the display instruction data, and the contents of the display instruction data are read using the image data. Control for displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 is executed. In addition, by writing a test data read command, which is a command for reading test data for a predetermined CGROM, to a predetermined register, the test data stored at a specific address of the CGROM designated by the command Is read and the control data is written in a predetermined register that can be referred to by the sub-control unit 91. Further, a checksum instruction that is an instruction for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area for a predetermined CGROM is written in a predetermined register, so that a checksum of a specific area of the CGROM specified by the instruction is written. And a control for writing the calculation result in a predetermined register that can be referred to by the sub-control unit 91 is executed. In addition, when a predetermined instruction is written in a predetermined register, predetermined control is executed, and the control is completed, the sub-control unit 91 sets a flag that can specify that the predetermined control according to the instruction is completed. The data is written in a predetermined register that can be referred to.

  In the CGROMs 99a to 99c, image data for the sub-control unit 91 to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 is stored in advance, and a character to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, a background effect, or the like is configured as the image data. Graphic data, font data of characters and symbols, video data, template data that serves as a template such as positions for displaying characters and characters, etc. are stored, and the display control circuit 92 refers to the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c. It is possible. In addition, in each CGROM 99a-c, data in a specific area to be subjected to a checksum, which will be described later, is obtained by correctly connecting the CGROM 99a-c to the CGROM substrate 99, so that the checksum calculation result is the connection position of the CGROM 99a-c. (In this embodiment, the CGROMs 99a to 99c are correctly connected to the CGROM board 99, so that the calculation result of each checksum is “1234” in order. , “5678”, “9ABC”). In the present embodiment, the configuration includes three CGROMs CGROMs 99a to 99c. However, a configuration including one CGROM or a configuration including more than three CGROMs may be used.

  The LED drive circuits 93a to 93e are circuits of independent systems, to which effect effects LEDs 52a to 52c, a reel LED 55, and an effect LED 56a are respectively connected. When a control signal is input to one of the LED drive circuits 93a to 93e, the corresponding effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, and the effect LED 56a are controlled to be lit.

  The checking LED 59 is connected to the sub-control unit 91 without going through the LED drive circuit, and can be directly turned on by the sub-CPU 91a.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the predetermined area of the ROM 91b in the sub-control unit 91, in each CGROM 99a-c, test data stored at a specific address read based on the above-described test data read command is stored. Is stored in advance as verification data. In the present embodiment, the ROM 91b stores 16 bytes of data (00h, 01h, 02h,..., 0fh) starting from a predetermined address of the CGROM 99a as collation data of the CGROM 99a and the predetermined data of the CGROM 99b as collation data of the CGROM 99b. Data of 16 bytes starting from the address (10h, 11h, 12h,..., 1fh) and data of 16 bytes starting from a predetermined address of the CGROM 99c (20h, 21h, 22h,..., 2fh) are stored. In addition, in a predetermined area of the ROM 91b, data (font data and the like) that is necessary at least for displaying information such as characters and symbols on the liquid crystal display 51 is stored in advance as information display data.

  The sub-control unit 91 is a control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c, and a simple check for displaying whether or not a ROM containing predetermined data is mounted on the CGROM board, and a ROM mounted on the CGROM board It is possible to execute a detailed check that displays the data contents of The control contents regarding the simple check and the detailed check will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started and the sub control unit 91 is turned on when the production control board 90 is turned on and is activated due to the occurrence of a reset, the sub control unit 91 performs a setting at the time of activation. In addition, when the effect control board 90 is turned on, the power LED 60 provided on the effect control board 90 is turned on, which suggests that the sub-control unit 91 is in operation. The sub-control unit 91 waits until a command is received from the main control unit 41 for a predetermined period after performing the startup setting, and when receiving the command, starts the control according to the command. On the other hand, if no command is received in a predetermined period after the startup setting, the simple check control is started.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the sub-control unit 91 waits while determining whether or not a command is received after the power is turned on, and a predetermined period has elapsed without receiving any command. If it is determined that the simple check control is started, the lighting effects of the effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 indicate that the simple check control is being executed. It is set to the checking mode 1 in which the lighting is performed in a mode different from that at the time of activation. By setting the mode 1 during checking, the LED drive circuits 93a to 93e are different from the lighting mode at the time of the normal effect in the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, and the effect LED 56a connected to the respective circuits. Is controlled so as to be visible (for example, flashing at a faster or slower cycle than normal startup, lighting in a different color, etc.), and the sub-control unit 91 sets the checking LED 59 to a simple check The lighting mode (for example, the lighting mode that always lights in red) that allows visual recognition that the control is being executed is controlled. Thus, the slot machine 1 indicates that the simple check control is being executed by controlling these LEDs to the checking mode 1 over the period in which the simple check control is being executed by the sub-control unit 91. Can be recognized from outside.

  Then, after setting the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c to the checking mode 1, the sub control unit 91 displays information such as characters and symbols on the liquid crystal display 51 at least as information display data ( In this embodiment, the font data is read from the ROM 91b and written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92. Thereafter, an instruction to read the information display data from the register is written in the register of the display control circuit 92.

  On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 reads the information display data from the register according to the instruction by the sub-control unit 91 writing the instruction into a predetermined register, and stores the working memory in the display control circuit 92. The information display data is stored in the VRAM which is an area. Further, after the information display data is stored in the VRAM, an information display data storage flag indicating that the information display data is stored in the VRAM is set in a predetermined register.

  After confirming that the information display data storage flag is set in the register of the display control circuit 92, the sub-control unit 91 displays display instruction data for displaying a simple check screen indicating that the simple check is being executed. Is written to the register of the display control circuit 92, and then the display command 1 is written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92.

  On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 displays a simple check screen on the liquid crystal display 51 with the contents of the display instruction data by referring to the display instruction data of the register by the display instruction 1 being written in a predetermined register. Control to display an image or the like is executed. In the control for displaying the simple check screen, the layout and characters of the image to be displayed are specified based on the display instruction data, and the characters are displayed according to the information display data stored in the VRAM along the specified layout. 54A, as shown in FIG. 54A, the display area 51a other than the transmission area 51b among the areas in which an image or the like can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (in this embodiment, the display window 3 of the reel). A simple check screen is displayed in the upper display area 51a). As shown in FIG. 54B, on the simple check screen at the start of the simple check, a character string (“CGROM Check 1” in this embodiment) that can specify that the simple check is being executed, Character strings (in this embodiment, “CGROM-a”, “CGROM-b”, “CGROM-c”) indicating the CGROMs 99a to 99c to be inspected are displayed using the font data included in the information display data. Let

  The sub-control unit 91 writes the display command 1 in the register of the display control circuit 92 and displays the simple check screen on the liquid crystal display 51, and then designates one specific CGROM among the CGROMs 99a to 99c as the inspection target. A test data read instruction (in this embodiment, designated in the order of CGROMs 99a, b, and c) is written into a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92. On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 reads the inspection data from the CGROM designated by the instruction by writing the inspection data read instruction to the predetermined register, and stores the inspection data in the predetermined register. A test data storage flag indicating that the test data has been written is set in a predetermined register. The display control circuit 92 does not read the inspection data of the CGROM designated by the inspection data read instruction (for example, the data storage area is destroyed or the CGROM is appropriately connected to the CGROM substrate 99). If the data cannot be read out), data that does not match the verification data (for example, all 0 or 1 data, etc.) is set in the register as inspection data, and the inspection data Set the storage flag in a predetermined register.

  Further, after writing the inspection data read instruction to the predetermined register, the sub-control unit 91 refers to the predetermined area of the ROM 91b and reads the verification data corresponding to the CGROM designated by the inspection data read instruction. After the inspection data storage flag is set in a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, the inspection data is read from the registry of the display control circuit 92. Then, the comparison data and the inspection data are compared. If the two match, display instruction data indicating that the CGROM to be inspected is normal is created. On the other hand, if the two do not match, Display instruction data indicating that there is an abnormality in the CGROM to be inspected is created. Then, the created display instruction data is written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and the display command 1 is further written to the predetermined register. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the CGROMs 99a to 99c have been inspected. When it is determined that all the CGROMs 99a to 99c have not been inspected, the above-described control is repeatedly executed with the remaining CGROMs as inspection targets. To do.

  On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 sets the inspection data storage flag and then writes the display instruction 1 to a predetermined register, thereby referring to the display instruction data in the register and displaying the contents of the display instruction data. The simple check screen is updated according to the control to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the comparison result between the verification data and the inspection data by the sub-control unit 91. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), when the comparison result between the verification data and the inspection data is normal for CGROM 99a and abnormal for CGROMs 99b and c, A character string ("OK" in this embodiment) that can be specified as normal is displayed at a position corresponding to CGROM 99a, and an error can be specified at positions corresponding to CGROM 99b and c. Character string ("NG" in this embodiment) is displayed. In addition, when displaying a character string that can be specified as abnormal, the simple check screen is updated so that the color of the character string and the background color around the character string are reversed and displayed. Then, even when any of the other CGROMs 99a to 99c is normal or abnormal, similarly, the simple check screen is updated so that the character string corresponding to normal or abnormal is displayed for each CGROM 99a to 99c. The inspection results of the CGROMs 99a to 99c by the simple check are displayed.

  If the sub-control unit 91 determines that all the CGROMs 99a to 99c have been inspected, the sub-control unit 91 ends the control in the checking mode 1 of the effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, the LED 56a for checking, and the LED 59 being checked. . After that, the system waits until the effect switch 56 is operated. When it is detected that the effect switch 56 is operated, it is determined that there is a request to execute the detail check, and the detail check process described later is executed. Then, a detailed check is performed on the CGROMs 99a to 99c.

  As described above, the sub control unit 91 can display the simple check screen on the liquid crystal display 51 by the display control circuit 92 using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b in the simple check. It has become.

  In addition, on the simple check screen, the result of the simple check is displayed corresponding to the CGROMs 99a to 99c using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b, so that an abnormality (the data of the data in the CGROM is displayed). It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality or abnormality in the connection position of the CGROM. Further, when there is an abnormality in a specific CGROM, the character string indicating the inspection result for the corresponding CGROM is inverted and displayed, so that it is easy to recognize that there is an abnormality in the specific CGROM.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 sets the lighting mode of the effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, the lighting LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 to the checking mode 1 during execution of the simple check control, so that the predetermined lighting mode is set. Therefore, it is possible to recognize from the outside of the slot machine 1 that the simple check control is being executed. For example, if the liquid crystal display 51, the display control circuit 92, the sub-control unit 91, or the like fails, the simple check is performed. Even when the screen is not normally displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, it is possible to recognize that the simple check is being controlled.

  Next, the control contents regarding the detailed check will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG.

  The sub-control unit 91 executes the above-described simple check control to display the comparison result between the verification data and the inspection data for the CGROMs 99a to 99c on the simple check screen, and then detects the operation of the effect switch 56. As a result, detailed check control is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 55, after starting the control of the detailed check, the sub-control unit 91 first controls the lighting state of the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59. Is set to the checking mode 2 in which the lighting is performed in a mode different from that at the time of normal startup and simple check. By setting the mode 2 during the check, the LED drive circuits 93a to 93e turn on the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, and the effect LED 56a connected to the respective circuits at the time of normal effect and simple check. Control to a lighting mode that can be visually recognized as different from the mode (for example, a mode that flashes at a faster or slower cycle than normal startup and a simple check mode, a mode that lights in a different color, etc.) The checking LED 59 is controlled to a lighting mode (for example, a lighting mode flashing red) that allows visual recognition that the detailed check control is being executed. Accordingly, the slot machine 1 indicates that the detailed check control is being executed by controlling these LEDs in the checking state 2 over the period in which the detailed check control is being executed in the sub-control unit 91. Can be recognized from outside.

  Thereafter, the sub-control unit 91 writes display instruction data for displaying a detailed check screen indicating that the detailed check is being executed to the register of the display control circuit 92, and then the display command 1 is displayed in the display control circuit 92. Write to a predetermined register.

  On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 displays the detailed check screen on the liquid crystal display 51 with the content of the display instruction data by referring to the display instruction data of the register by the display instruction 1 being written in the predetermined register. Control to display an image or the like is executed. In the control for displaying the detailed check screen, the layout and characters of the image to be displayed are specified based on the display instruction data, and are stored in the VRAM from the simple check control along the specified layout. By displaying characters and the like according to the information display data, the display area 51a other than the transmissive area 51b (in this embodiment, the reel area) can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as in the simple check screen. A detail check screen is displayed in the display area 51a) on the upper side of the see-through window 3. As shown in FIG. 56 (b), on the detail check screen at the start of the detail check, a character string that can specify that the detail check is being executed (in this embodiment, “CGROM Check2”), Character strings (in this embodiment, “CGROM-a”, “CGROM-b”, “CGROM-c”) indicating the CGROMs 99a to 99c to be inspected and the checksums of the CGROMs 99a to 99c are being calculated. Is displayed using font data included in the information display data (in this embodiment, “Calculating...”).

  The sub-control unit 91 writes the display command 1 to the register of the display control circuit 92 and displays the detailed check screen on the liquid crystal display 51, and then designates one specific CGROM among the CGROMs 99a to 99c as the inspection target. A checksum instruction (in this embodiment, designated in the order of CGROMs 99a, b, and c) is written into a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92. On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 sequentially reads data in a specific area of the CGROM designated by the instruction, and calculates the checksum by writing the checksum instruction into a predetermined register. Is written in a predetermined register, and an operation completion flag indicating that the operation result has been written is set in the predetermined register. Note that the display control circuit 92 cannot read data in a specific area of the CGROM designated by the checksum instruction (for example, the data storage area has been destroyed, or the CGROM is properly connected to the CGROM board 99). If the data cannot be read out), data that does not match the normal checksum calculation result (for example, data other than the checksum value of each CGROM 99a-c calculated in advance) is calculated. As a result, it is set in a register, and an operation completion flag is set in a predetermined register.

  The sub-control unit 91 stores the checksum calculation result when the calculation completion flag is set in the predetermined register of the display control circuit 92 after writing the checksum instruction to the predetermined register. Read by referring to the register. Then, the calculation result of the checksum is set as display instruction data, written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and display instruction 1 is further written to the predetermined register. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the CGROMs 99a to 99c have been inspected. When it is determined that all the CGROMs 99a to 99c have not been inspected, the above-described control is repeatedly executed with the remaining CGROMs as inspection targets. To do.

  On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 refers to the display instruction data of the register and displays the contents of the display instruction data on the liquid crystal display by setting the operation completion flag and then writing the display instruction 1 into a predetermined register. The detail check screen is updated so that the control result displayed on the device 51, that is, the checksum calculation result is displayed. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B, when the checksum calculation result for CGROM 99a is written to the register as display instruction data, the checksum displayed in correspondence with CGROM 99a on the detailed check screen is displayed. The character string indicating that the calculation is in progress is updated to a character string indicating the checksum calculation result (in this embodiment, “1234”), indicating that calculation is being performed for all CGROMs 99a, b, and c. The detail check is completed when the character string is updated to a character string indicating a checksum calculation result.

  When the sub-control unit 91 determines that all the CGROMs 99a to 99c are inspected by displaying the checksum calculation result on the liquid crystal display 51 by the display control circuit 92 for all the CGROMs 99a, 99b, and 99c. Finishes the control in the checking mode 2 of the effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59, and ends the detailed check control.

  As described above, the sub control unit 91 can display the detailed check screen on the liquid crystal display 51 by the display control circuit 92 using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b in the detailed check. It has become. Further, on the detailed check screen, the result of the checksum calculation of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is displayed using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b, so that an error is detected in a specific CGROM (an error in the data in the CGROM). It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the connection position of the CGROM.

  In addition, the data of the specific area that is the target of the checksum of the CGROMs 99a to 99c of this embodiment is correctly connected to the CGROM substrate 99, so that the checksum calculation result corresponds to the connection position of the CGROMs 99a to 99c. For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the calculation result of the checksum of the CGROMs 99a to 99c on the detailed check screen is a predetermined continuous numerical value. Therefore, it is possible to determine that there is an abnormality in the CGROM 99b and CGROM 99c (in this embodiment, an abnormality in the connection position of the CGROM). Connecting, i.e. checking CGROM 99a-c The CGROMs 99a to 99c are correctly connected to the CGROM board 99 by connecting so that the calculation result of the thumb becomes a predetermined continuous numerical value (in this embodiment, “1234”, “5678”, “9ABC” in this order). So that it can be determined on the detailed check screen.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 sets the lighting mode of the effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 to the checking mode 2 during the execution of the detailed check, and the predetermined lighting mode. Therefore, it is possible to recognize from the outside of the slot machine 1 that the detailed check control is being executed. For example, if the liquid crystal display 51, the display control circuit 92, the sub-control unit 91, etc. fail, the simple check Even when the screen is not normally displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, it can be recognized that the detailed check is being controlled. In addition, during the execution of the detailed check, the lighting state of the effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 is different from the checking mode 1 set during the execution of the simple check. Since these LEDs are controlled to a predetermined lighting mode by setting to 2, when the simple check or detailed check control is being executed, which of the controls is in effect is produced. The LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, the production LED 56a, and the LED 59 during checking can be discriminated.

  The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment has a history of receiving commands stored in the RAM 91c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as command history), backup data of the sub-control unit 91 (control state of main control unit 41, game situation) And a game history, etc.), information on the sub-control unit 91 such as time information of the clock device 97, and the like. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information display control for inspection is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. As a predetermined condition, an inspection display command that can specify which of these pieces of information is requested to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by connecting the inspection terminal of the slot machine to the sub-control unit 91, When received from the inspection terminal, inspection information display control is executed, and the type of information specified based on the inspection display command is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Cause shown. The control content of the inspection information display control executed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the inspection terminal receives a command indicating the type of information requested to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the predetermined operation. It is specified from the history, the control status of the main control unit 41 stored in the sub-control unit 91, the game history, the time information of the clock device 97, and the like. Then, an inspection display command capable of specifying the type of information requested to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 receives the examination display command, identifies the type of information requested to be displayed based on the examination display command, and displays the identified type of information. The information display data (font data in the present embodiment) that is necessary at the minimum is read from the ROM 91b and written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and then the information display data is read from the register. The instruction is written in the register of the display control circuit 92. Thereafter, data corresponding to the type of information specified based on the examination display command is read from the RAM 91c, and display instruction data is created based on the corresponding data. For example, when the type of information requested to be displayed is a command history, a new command is displayed on one screen in a time series from the commands stored in the RAM 91c (in this embodiment, 100 steps). The number of items that can be displayed (25 commands in this embodiment) is sequentially selected, and display instruction data including information on the selected commands is created. When the type of information requested to be displayed is backup data of the sub-control unit 91, the control status of the main control unit 41 stored in the RAM 91c (based on the command received from the main control unit 41) The state of the specified main control unit 41, for example, during AT, setting change state, etc., gaming state (RT0-4, RB), gaming history (the number of medals paid out during a predetermined number of games, ART lottery Display instruction data including information such as the number of times of winning, the number of winning of special roles, etc.). Further, when the type of information requested to be displayed is time information of the clock device 97, display instruction data including the time information is created with reference to the time information of the clock device 97.

  After the display instruction data corresponding to the type of information requested to be displayed is created, the display instruction data is written in a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and information display data is stored in the predetermined register of the display control circuit 92. After confirming that the storage flag is set, the display instruction 1 is written in a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92.

  On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 refers to the display instruction data in the register by the display instruction 1 being written into the predetermined register by the sub-control unit 91, and displays the display instruction data in the liquid crystal display 51. The information about the slot machine 1 corresponding to the type of information requested to be displayed is displayed.

  In addition, when the type of information requested to be displayed is command history, the inspection terminal determines whether or not a predetermined page turning operation has been performed after sending the inspection display command, and page turning. Each time it is determined that an operation has been performed, a page feed command that can specify that a page feed operation has been performed is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 displays the command history on the liquid crystal display 51 and then receives the page feed command, the command stored in the RAM 91c (in this embodiment, 100 steps). ), Commands other than the command once displayed are sequentially selected in a time-sequential number of commands that can be displayed on one screen (in this example, 25 commands), and information on the selected command is selected. Display instruction data including Then, after the display instruction data is written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, a display command 1 is written to the predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, so that the display control circuit 92 newly receives the display instruction data based on the display instruction data. A command history is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  By repeating such control every time a page feed command is received, the command history stored in the RAM 91c can be sequentially displayed according to the page feed operation. If the page turning operation is repeatedly performed and the last command in the command history is displayed and then the page turning operation is further performed, the command history is sequentially displayed again after returning to the first command.

  Thus, in the inspection information display control executed by the sub control unit 91 receiving the inspection display command from the inspection terminal, the information is stored in the ROM 91b using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b. Using the information display data, the display control circuit 92 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to receive the command reception history stored in the RAM 91c, the backup data of the sub-control unit 91 (control state of the main control unit 41, game status, Game information, etc.), time information of the clock device 97, and the like, the predetermined information related to the slot machine 1 can be displayed.

  The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment writes display instruction data for specifying the contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and further displays an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 with the contents of the display instruction data. Is written in another predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and the display control circuit 92 uses the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c mounted on the CGROM substrate 99. Then, it is possible to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the display instruction data, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is executed, and the result of the inspection Is written in a predetermined register as display instruction data, and the result of the inspection can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In such a configuration, in the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c, when displaying the inspection result on the liquid crystal display 51, the inspection is performed using the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c. If there is an abnormality in the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c, there is a possibility that the inspection result cannot be displayed normally.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the control ROM 91b provided in the sub-control unit 91 is for information display including image data necessary for displaying information such as characters and symbols on the liquid crystal display 51. Data is stored in advance, and the sub-control unit 91 uses the information display data stored in the ROM 91b for the operation of the display control circuit 92 when executing the control for examining the storage contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c. The display control circuit 92 stores a display command for displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 with the content of the display instruction data in a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92. As a result, the inspection result is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b, so that the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c are verified. In displaying the result of the inspection on the liquid crystal display 51 in the control for the display, not the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c but the information display stored in the control ROM 91b provided in the sub-control unit 91 Since the inspection result is displayed using the image data included in the image data, the inspection result can be displayed normally even if there is an abnormality in the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c. it can.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 instructs the display control circuit 92 so that the display control circuit 92 displays an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the display instruction data, that is, a plurality of control means. The liquid crystal display 51 is controlled to display an image or the like, but the control means for controlling the liquid crystal display 51 to display an image or the like is configured by a single control means, for example, A configuration in which the sub-control unit 91 directly displays an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 according to display instruction data may be used. In addition, as a configuration for performing control for displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 by a plurality of control means, for example, a second sub-control unit provided separately from a first sub-control unit that controls control related to the effects of the slot machine 1. The sub-control unit may instruct the display control circuit based on an instruction from the first sub-control unit so that an image or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c executed by the sub control unit 91, a simple check and a detailed check can be executed. In the simple check, a specific address of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is specified. Is compared with the verification data stored in the ROM 91b to check whether the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c are normal depending on whether or not they match. A configuration for determining whether or not the specific data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c is normal depending on whether or not the specific data stored in the ROM 91b, which is another storage unit, matches. In the detailed check, a checksum of data in a specific area of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is calculated, and the calculation result is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c are normal, that is, to output a calculation result calculated by a predetermined calculation from predetermined data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the output data is normal based on the specific data or the calculation result. However, in the control for examining the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c executed by the sub-control unit 91, Any configuration may be used as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c storing image data are normal. For example, specific data stored in the CGROM is output. By doing so, it may be possible to determine whether it is normal or not based on the specific data that is output. Even in a configuration in which it is possible to determine whether the calculation result calculated by a predetermined calculation from specific data stored in the memory or the image data stored in the CGROM is a specific value. The calculation result calculated by the predetermined calculation from the image data stored in the CGROM may be provided only for ROM of other storage means, for example, other control means such as the sub-control unit 91 or for inspection. It may be possible to determine whether it is normal or not based on whether or not it matches a specific value stored in the ROM or the like.

  For example, in the configuration in which it is possible to determine whether or not the output data is normal by outputting the specific data stored in the CGROM, the specific data to be output is each CGROM. By determining the value to be a unique value (for example, identification number, arrangement number, name of each CGROM), it is determined whether or not it is normal based on the specific data that is output. Can be facilitated. Further, in such a configuration, when the arrangement order and inspection order of each CGROM are determined in advance, the output specific data is made to match the value indicating the arrangement order and inspection order of each CGROM. Thus, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the output data is normal, in particular, whether or not the CGROMs are arranged and inspected in a predetermined order.

  In the present embodiment, in the detailed check, the checksum of a specific area stored in CGROMa to c is calculated, and the result of the calculation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. However, the result of the detailed check As an alternative, the liquid crystal display 51 may be configured to display a value other than the checksum operation value, for example, a value such as parity, or a determination result as to whether or not the value such as parity matches a specific value. In such a configuration, whether or not the result of the operation is 0 by setting the values of the checksum, parity, etc. to a specific value (the last digit of the checksum is 0, the parity is 0, etc.). It is possible to determine whether or not the corresponding CGROM is normal only by determining, and it is not necessary to store comparison data.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 executes the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c. Information display data including image data necessary for displaying information such as symbols and symbols is stored in the VRAM of the display control circuit 92, and the inspection result is liquid crystal using the information display data. The display unit 51 is configured to display the information display data stored in the VRAM of the display control circuit 92 by the sub-control unit 91 when the control for inspecting the storage contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is executed. Any data that is at least necessary for displaying the inspection result on the display 51 may be used. When the inspection result is displayed as an image, image data or the like may be used. Ku, in the case of displaying the character and symbols, etc., may be a font data and the like, may be a combination of these.

  The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment uses the information display data stored in the ROM 91b to execute the control for inspecting the storage contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the information display data is font data for displaying characters constituting the simple check screen and the detailed check screen for displaying the inspection result. Because it is possible to display the result of inspection, it is easy to recognize the result of the inspection, and the inspection result more than the number of stored data is displayed, that is, the information more than the number of stored characters is displayed by the combination of a plurality of characters. Can do.

  In the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment, data matching the inspection data stored at the specific addresses of the CGROMs 99a to 99c to be inspected is stored in the control ROM 91b as collation data. In the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c, it is inspected whether or not each CGROM 99a to 99c is normal by comparing the verification data with the inspection data read from the CGROMs 99a to 99c. That is, since the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c are inspected using the collation data stored outside the CGROMs 99a to 99c, the data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c is normal even if there is an abnormality. Can be inspected.

  In this embodiment, image data for displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 is stored in the plurality of CGROMs 99a to 99c, and the sub-control unit 91 stores the plurality of CGROMs 99a to 99c in which the image data is stored. Whether or not each of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is normal by reading out the inspection data stored at each predetermined address and comparing it with the corresponding CGROM verification data stored in the control ROM 91b. Therefore, when the stored content of any of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is not normal, it is possible to specify which of the CGROMs 99a to 99c has the abnormal stored content.

  The liquid crystal display 51 of the present embodiment has a transmissive area 51b that can visually recognize each reel 2L, 2C, 2R disposed on the back surface in a part of a display area where an image or the like can be displayed. When the control for inspecting the storage contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is executed, the unit 91 displays a simple check screen and a detailed check screen for displaying the inspection results of the CGROMs 99a to 99c by the display control circuit 92. Since the display area is displayed in a display area other than the transmission area 51b, the visibility of the inspection result displayed by the display control circuit 92 can be ensured.

  When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform predetermined information related to the sub-control unit 91 (in this embodiment, the command reception history stored in the RAM 91c, the sub-control unit 91 It is possible to execute inspection information display control for displaying backup data (control state of the main control unit 41, gaming status, gaming history, etc., time information of the clock device 97, etc.) on the liquid crystal display 51, When executing the inspection information display control, the information display data stored in the ROM 91b is stored in the VRAM which is a working storage area of the display control circuit 92, and the sub-control unit 91 according to a predetermined condition is stored. A table indicating that predetermined information on the display control data is written in a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92 and an image or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 with the content of the display instruction data. By writing an instruction to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, the display control circuit 92 uses the information display data stored in the ROM 91b to perform predetermined information regarding the sub-control unit 91 according to a predetermined condition. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, so that the sub-control unit uses image data included in the information display data stored in the ROM 91b of the sub-control unit 91 instead of the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c. Since the information on 91 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the information on the sub-control unit 91 can be normally displayed even when there is an abnormality in the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c.

  The sub-control unit 91 uses the information display data stored in the ROM 91b by the display control circuit 92 to execute the control for inspecting the storage contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c. Although it is a structure which can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the memory | storage means which the sub-control part 91 test | inspects the memory | storage content is memory | storage means other than CGROM, for example, SOUNDROM in which the sound data for production are memorize | stored Even in such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 displays the inspection result on the liquid crystal display 51 using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b, so that the CGROMs 99a to 99c. Even when there is an abnormality in the image data stored in the information, information regarding the sub-control unit 91 can be displayed normally.

  The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment writes display instruction data for specifying the contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and further displays an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 with the contents of the display instruction data. Is written in another predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and the display control circuit 92 uses the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to 99c mounted on the CGROM substrate 99. Then, it is possible to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the display instruction data, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is executed, and the result of the inspection Is written in a predetermined register as display instruction data, and the result of the inspection can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In such a configuration, in the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c, when the inspection result is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the inspection is not performed normally or the liquid crystal display 51 itself or If a problem occurs in the display control circuit 92 itself, the test result is not finally displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In this case, whether the test is not performed normally, the liquid crystal display 51 Alternatively, it cannot be specified whether the display control circuit 92 is defective.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 executes control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the inspection result is predetermined as display instruction data. When the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c is executed, the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c can be displayed. Since the lighting of the reel LED 55, the production LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 is controlled in a lighting mode (checking mode 1 and checking mode 2) that can be visually recognized to be different from the lighting mode at the time of the normal performance, the liquid crystal display 51 The mode of the notification means provided separately from the normal mode is different from the normal mode (for example, the mode of flashing at a faster or slower cycle than the normal startup, Since the sub-control unit 91 can recognize that the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c are being inspected, the liquid crystal display 51 is finally brought to the liquid crystal display 51. When the result of the inspection is not displayed, it can be estimated whether the inspection by the sub-control unit 91 is not normally performed or whether the liquid crystal display 51 or the display control circuit 92 has a problem.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, the checking LED 59, that is, the liquid crystal, when executing the control for examining the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c. Although it is the structure which controls the alerting | reporting means provided separately from the indicator 51 to the aspect which can be visually recognized that it differs from the lighting aspect at the time of a normal production, it is controlled when performing the control which test | inspects CGROM99a-c. The informing means to be provided may be provided separately from the liquid crystal display 51, for example, a display means such as a liquid crystal display or a 7-segment display provided separately from the liquid crystal display 51, light emission It may be a light emitting means such as a lamp or LED that changes the aspect, a sound output means that changes the sound output aspect, a movable member that changes the operation aspect, or the like.

  When the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes the control for examining the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c, the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, that is, the effect means used for the effect, Since lighting control is performed in a lighting mode (for example, a mode of blinking at a faster or later cycle than normal startup) that can be visually recognized as different from the lighting mode at the time of normal performance, the production means used for the production is used. Thus, it can be recognized that the inspection by the sub-control unit 91 is being performed.

  The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment controls the checking LED 59, that is, the notification unit on the effect control board 90 for the simple check and the detailed check when executing the control for checking the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c. Is controlled so that it can be visually recognized (for example, a lighting mode that always lights up or blinks in red), so that only the board on which the checking LED 59 is mounted, that is, the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c are arranged. The inspection by the sub-control unit 91 can be performed while recognizing that the inspection by the sub-control unit 91 is performed without using the front door 1b and the reel unit 2 on which the reel LED 55 is disposed. It becomes possible.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs the effect check LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, that is, the effect means used for the effect, and the check when performing the simple check and the detailed check control. Both the middle LED 59, that is, the notification means on the effect control board 90 are controlled to a predetermined lighting mode, but when the simple check and the detailed check are controlled, the effect effect LEDs 52a to 52c, the reel LED 55, A configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the effect LED 56a and the checking LED 59 is controlled to a predetermined lighting mode. By setting it as such a structure, it can be made to recognize whether the test | inspection is performed by the sub-control part 91. FIG.

  When the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment executes the control for examining the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c, the effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, and the effect LED 56a are respectively provided in separate LED drive circuits 93a to 93a. Through e, the lighting control is performed in a lighting mode that can be visually recognized to be different from the lighting mode at the time of normal performance (for example, a mode of flashing at a faster or slower cycle than that at the time of normal activation), and therefore, the LED drive circuit 93a Even when a malfunction occurs in a part of ~ e, the notification means that is controlled to be turned on via another system has a lighting mode different from the lighting mode at the time of normal production, so the sub-control unit 91 causes the CGROM 99a ~ It can be recognized that the stored contents of c are being inspected.

  The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment, when executing the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to 99c, effects effects LEDs 52a to 52c connected via the LED drive circuits 93a to 93e, reel LEDs 55, It is visually recognized that the LED 56a for production and the checking LED 59 connected in a separate system from the production effect LEDs 52a to 52c are different from the lighting mode at the time of the ordinary production without using the LED driving circuits 93a to 93e. Since lighting control is performed in a possible lighting mode (for example, a mode of flashing at a faster or slower cycle than normal startup), even if a problem occurs in the LED driving circuits 93a to 93e, the LED driving circuits 93a to 93e. Since the checking LED 59 that is controlled to be lighted separately from the lighting state is different from the lighting state at the time of normal performance, the sub-control unit 91 The inspection of the contents of CGROM99a~c is being performed can be recognized.

  As mentioned above, although the Example and modification of this invention were demonstrated with drawing, this invention is not limited to this Example, Even if there is a change and addition in the range which does not deviate from the main point of this invention, this invention. Needless to say, it is included in

  In the above-described embodiment and modification, the example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which bets are set using medals and credits as game values has been described. However, bets using game balls as game values are calculated. The present invention may be applied to a slot machine to be set or a fully credit type slot machine in which a bet amount is set by using only credit as a game value. When using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when 3 is set as the number of bets in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. It may be. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls when a winning occurs. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out all of utility values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other gaming machines are also described. Is a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by launching a game ball in the game area, for example, a reel having a plurality of types of identification information arranged on the outer periphery, and a transparent liquid crystal display, etc. The control related to the transmissive display device described in the above embodiment can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machine in which the transmissive display device is provided on the front side (player side) of the reel. There is an effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other gaming machines are also described. This is a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by launching a game ball into the game area, and includes, for example, a reel having a light emitting device that can irradiate a plurality of types of identification information arranged on the outer periphery from the back side. A transmissive display device such as a transmissive liquid crystal display is provided on the front side (player side) of the reel, and the light emitting device of the reel also functions as the backlight of the transmissive display device. The control related to the reel LED described in the embodiment can be applied, and the same function and effect can be obtained in this case.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

In gaming machines that perform games,
Image display means capable of displaying an image;
Informing means provided separately from the image display means,
Display control means for performing display control of the image display means;
Control data storage means for storing control data of the display control means;
Image data storage means for storing image data of an image to be displayed on the image display means;
With
The display control means includes
Inspection means for inspecting the stored contents of the image data storage means;
Inspection result display control means for displaying the inspection result by the inspection means on the image display means;
A notification control unit that sets a mode of the notification unit to a predetermined mode different from a normal mode when an inspection is performed by the inspection unit;
Including gaming machines.

Images